https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&user=Stownsend&feedformat=atomProtocase Designer Documentation - User contributions [en]2024-03-29T07:47:14ZUser contributionsMediaWiki 1.27.1https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released&diff=3208Knowledgebase - Software Fixes Released2016-10-06T16:20:14Z<p>Stownsend: /* Masking */</p>
<hr />
<div>__NOTOC__<br />
Fixes are documented on this page as they are released in Beta versions after the current General Release, which is Version 4.5. Links to fixes in previous Beta releases are at the bottom of this page.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Links to the latest release==<br />
The latest beta version released is [[Release_Notes_for_BETA_Version_4.5.3-Oct04|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.5.3-Oct04,16''']], except for Mac 10.6 (which still uses the Jun09 version) and Mac 10.7 (for which a link will be published soon).<br><br><br />
<br />
To begin the download, click the appropriate link below. For installation instructions, please see [[Quick Start#Installing Designer|Installing Designer]].<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-4.5.3-Oct04,16.exe '''Windows''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Jun09,16.zip '''Mac OSX 10.6 in ZIP format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Jun09,16.tar '''Mac OSX 10.6 in TAR format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Oct04.zip '''Mac OSX 10.8 in ZIP format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Oct04,16.tar '''Mac OSX 10.8 in TAR format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/jdesigner-4.5.3-Oct04,16-x64.deb '''Linux Debian amd64''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/jdesigner-4.5.3-JOct04,16-i586.deb '''Linux Debian i586''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-linux-amd64-4.5.3-Oct04,16.tar.gz '''Linux amd64''']]<br><br />
:[[http://http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-linux-i586-4.5.3-Oct04,16.tar.gz '''Linux i586''']]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Fixes released in October 2016==<br />
===Masking===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Oct04,16 fixed the following issues with masking:<br />
*Masking on cold rolled steel automatically removed the masking instead of just displaying a warning.<br />
*Masked objects could not be edited in the Properties panel.<br />
*Masking placed on top of silkscreened graphics covered the graphics instead of the other way around.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Fixes released in May 2016==<br />
===Corners with 0.0" radii===<br />
Version 4.5.3-May06 fixes an issue in which a bracket with a 0.0" corner radius caused Designer to crash. With this release, 0.0" radii are supported. <br />
===Tapped holes for connectors===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-May06,16, the USB 3.0 A-A panel connector and USB A-A coupler use tapped holes. <br />
===Cutout Library listing===<br />
Version 4.5.3-May06,16 fixes an issue in which the Cutout Library displayed items that were not useful for customers. (Known Issue: Admin Hardware is still displayed.)<br />
<br />
==Fixes released in April 2016==<br />
===5 Sided Enclosures and Consolets===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr27,16 fixed an issue in which cutouts in older 5-sided enclosures and consolets changed position when loaded. <br />
===Text Kerning===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr27,16 implemented text ''kerning,'' in which spacing is adjusted typographically between characters in proportional fonts. Text in previous designs will be retained without kerning, so that the text layout is not changed without the user being aware of it. <br />
===Documentation===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16, the Help menus for the Face Editor and Cutout Editor contain links to the documentation. <br />
===L Shape enclosures===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16 fixed an issue in which the L Shape enclosure template did not allow room for the seam welds when '''Has Seam Welds''' was selected.<br />
===Loading older files with PEMs===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16 fixed an issue in which opening certain older enclosure designs with PEMs did not load the PEMs. <br />
<br />
==Fixes released in March 2016==<br />
===Digital printing===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which digital printing could be incorrectly applied to a face that had no text or graphics (and included in the quote).<br />
===Text size in older files===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which, when older (4.2.x) files with text were loaded, the text size was incorrect when first loaded. <br />
===PEM nuts for thin enclosures===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Mar03, a different PEM nut is given to any enclosure (including the U Shape) with thin metal. <br />
===Wall mounts in 5-sided enclosures===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Mar03, the 5-Sided enclosure template defaults to being without wall mounts, and the '''Has Wall Mounts''' check box is cleared. <br />
===Cutout Editor===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which selecting an object in the Cutout Editor selected everything rather than just that object.<br />
==Fixes released in February 2016==<br />
===PEMs===<br />
Version 4.5.3 fixes an issue that prevented PEMs from being displayed on some older enclosure files, and an automated test was added to prevent it from recurring. <br />
===U Shape enclosures===<br />
With Version 4.5.3, U Shape enclosures are given thinner nuts when the metal demands them. <br />
===Cutout Library===<br />
*Version 4.5.3 fixes the issue introduced in Version 4.5 in which, after creating a cutout in the Cutout Library, when you clicked '''Accept and Close''', the cutout appeared to have been deleted.<br />
*Version 4.5.2 fixes the issue in which hiding non-stock PEMs in the Cutout Library caused several problems (including previews not displaying, cutouts not storing correctly, and PEM dialog problems). These issues were fixed by returning the visibility of the non-stock items. The items will be hidden again in a future release.<br />
<br />
===Installing on a Mac OSX===<br />
Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16 fixes an issue in which installation on a Mac OSX produced an error message that the download was broken. <br />
===Rackmounts===<br />
Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16 fixes the issue in which galvaneal rackmounts with mounting brackets took many minutes to load.<br />
===Displaying cutout outlines===<br />
In Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16, the option to have the 3D View show or hide outlines for cutouts was added to Preferences. <br />
<br />
==Archival Beta Release Notes==<br />
[[Fixes released in Version 4.4.9|Fixes released for Version 4.4.9]]</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released&diff=3207Knowledgebase - Software Fixes Released2016-10-06T14:32:39Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div>__NOTOC__<br />
Fixes are documented on this page as they are released in Beta versions after the current General Release, which is Version 4.5. Links to fixes in previous Beta releases are at the bottom of this page.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Links to the latest release==<br />
The latest beta version released is [[Release_Notes_for_BETA_Version_4.5.3-Oct04|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.5.3-Oct04,16''']], except for Mac 10.6 (which still uses the Jun09 version) and Mac 10.7 (for which a link will be published soon).<br><br><br />
<br />
To begin the download, click the appropriate link below. For installation instructions, please see [[Quick Start#Installing Designer|Installing Designer]].<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-4.5.3-Oct04,16.exe '''Windows''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Jun09,16.zip '''Mac OSX 10.6 in ZIP format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Jun09,16.tar '''Mac OSX 10.6 in TAR format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Oct04.zip '''Mac OSX 10.8 in ZIP format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Oct04,16.tar '''Mac OSX 10.8 in TAR format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/jdesigner-4.5.3-Oct04,16-x64.deb '''Linux Debian amd64''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/jdesigner-4.5.3-JOct04,16-i586.deb '''Linux Debian i586''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-linux-amd64-4.5.3-Oct04,16.tar.gz '''Linux amd64''']]<br><br />
:[[http://http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-linux-i586-4.5.3-Oct04,16.tar.gz '''Linux i586''']]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Fixes released in October 2016==<br />
===Masking===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Oct04,16 fixed the following issues with masking:<br />
*Masking on cold rolled steel automatically removed the masking instead of just warning the user.<br />
*Masked objects could not be edited in the Properties panel.<br />
*Masking placed on top of graphics covered the graphics instead of the other way around.<br><br><br />
==Fixes released in May 2016==<br />
===Corners with 0.0" radii===<br />
Version 4.5.3-May06 fixes an issue in which a bracket with a 0.0" corner radius caused Designer to crash. With this release, 0.0" radii are supported. <br />
===Tapped holes for connectors===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-May06,16, the USB 3.0 A-A panel connector and USB A-A coupler use tapped holes. <br />
===Cutout Library listing===<br />
Version 4.5.3-May06,16 fixes an issue in which the Cutout Library displayed items that were not useful for customers. (Known Issue: Admin Hardware is still displayed.)<br />
<br />
==Fixes released in April 2016==<br />
===5 Sided Enclosures and Consolets===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr27,16 fixed an issue in which cutouts in older 5-sided enclosures and consolets changed position when loaded. <br />
===Text Kerning===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr27,16 implemented text ''kerning,'' in which spacing is adjusted typographically between characters in proportional fonts. Text in previous designs will be retained without kerning, so that the text layout is not changed without the user being aware of it. <br />
===Documentation===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16, the Help menus for the Face Editor and Cutout Editor contain links to the documentation. <br />
===L Shape enclosures===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16 fixed an issue in which the L Shape enclosure template did not allow room for the seam welds when '''Has Seam Welds''' was selected.<br />
===Loading older files with PEMs===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16 fixed an issue in which opening certain older enclosure designs with PEMs did not load the PEMs. <br />
<br />
==Fixes released in March 2016==<br />
===Digital printing===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which digital printing could be incorrectly applied to a face that had no text or graphics (and included in the quote).<br />
===Text size in older files===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which, when older (4.2.x) files with text were loaded, the text size was incorrect when first loaded. <br />
===PEM nuts for thin enclosures===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Mar03, a different PEM nut is given to any enclosure (including the U Shape) with thin metal. <br />
===Wall mounts in 5-sided enclosures===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Mar03, the 5-Sided enclosure template defaults to being without wall mounts, and the '''Has Wall Mounts''' check box is cleared. <br />
===Cutout Editor===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which selecting an object in the Cutout Editor selected everything rather than just that object.<br />
==Fixes released in February 2016==<br />
===PEMs===<br />
Version 4.5.3 fixes an issue that prevented PEMs from being displayed on some older enclosure files, and an automated test was added to prevent it from recurring. <br />
===U Shape enclosures===<br />
With Version 4.5.3, U Shape enclosures are given thinner nuts when the metal demands them. <br />
===Cutout Library===<br />
*Version 4.5.3 fixes the issue introduced in Version 4.5 in which, after creating a cutout in the Cutout Library, when you clicked '''Accept and Close''', the cutout appeared to have been deleted.<br />
*Version 4.5.2 fixes the issue in which hiding non-stock PEMs in the Cutout Library caused several problems (including previews not displaying, cutouts not storing correctly, and PEM dialog problems). These issues were fixed by returning the visibility of the non-stock items. The items will be hidden again in a future release.<br />
<br />
===Installing on a Mac OSX===<br />
Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16 fixes an issue in which installation on a Mac OSX produced an error message that the download was broken. <br />
===Rackmounts===<br />
Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16 fixes the issue in which galvaneal rackmounts with mounting brackets took many minutes to load.<br />
===Displaying cutout outlines===<br />
In Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16, the option to have the 3D View show or hide outlines for cutouts was added to Preferences. <br />
<br />
==Archival Beta Release Notes==<br />
[[Fixes released in Version 4.4.9|Fixes released for Version 4.4.9]]</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released&diff=3203Knowledgebase - Software Fixes Released2016-10-06T13:03:11Z<p>Stownsend: /* Links to the latest release */</p>
<hr />
<div>__NOTOC__<br />
Fixes are documented on this page as they are released in Beta versions after the current General Release, which is Version 4.5. Links to fixes in previous Beta releases are at the bottom of this page.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Links to the latest release==<br />
The latest beta version released is [[Release_Notes_for_BETA_Version_4.5.3-Oct04|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.5.3-Oct04,16''']], except for Mac 10.6 (which still uses the Jun09 version) and Mac 10.7 (for which a link will be published soon).<br><br><br />
<br />
To begin the download, click the appropriate link below. For installation instructions, please see [[Quick Start#Installing Designer|Installing Designer]].<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-4.5.3-Oct04,16.exe '''Windows''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Jun09,16.zip '''Mac OSX 10.6 in ZIP format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Jun09,16.tar '''Mac OSX 10.6 in TAR format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Oct04.zip '''Mac OSX 10.8 in ZIP format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Oct04,16.tar '''Mac OSX 10.8 in TAR format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/jdesigner-4.5.3-Oct04,16-x64.deb '''Linux Debian amd64''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/jdesigner-4.5.3-JOct04,16-i586.deb '''Linux Debian i586''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-linux-amd64-4.5.3-Oct04,16.tar.gz '''Linux amd64''']]<br><br />
:[[http://http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-linux-i586-4.5.3-Oct04,16.tar.gz '''Linux i586''']]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Fixes released in September 2016==<br />
''A list will be published soon.''<br />
==Fixes released in May 2016==<br />
===Corners with 0.0" radii===<br />
Version 4.5.3-May06 fixes an issue in which a bracket with a 0.0" corner radius caused Designer to crash. With this release, 0.0" radii are supported. <br />
===Tapped holes for connectors===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-May06,16, the USB 3.0 A-A panel connector and USB A-A coupler use tapped holes. <br />
===Cutout Library listing===<br />
Version 4.5.3-May06,16 fixes an issue in which the Cutout Library displayed items that were not useful for customers. (Known Issue: Admin Hardware is still displayed.)<br />
<br />
==Fixes released in April 2016==<br />
===5 Sided Enclosures and Consolets===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr27,16 fixed an issue in which cutouts in older 5-sided enclosures and consolets changed position when loaded. <br />
===Text Kerning===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr27,16 implemented text ''kerning,'' in which spacing is adjusted typographically between characters in proportional fonts. Text in previous designs will be retained without kerning, so that the text layout is not changed without the user being aware of it. <br />
===Documentation===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16, the Help menus for the Face Editor and Cutout Editor contain links to the documentation. <br />
===L Shape enclosures===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16 fixed an issue in which the L Shape enclosure template did not allow room for the seam welds when '''Has Seam Welds''' was selected.<br />
===Loading older files with PEMs===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16 fixed an issue in which opening certain older enclosure designs with PEMs did not load the PEMs. <br />
<br />
==Fixes released in March 2016==<br />
===Digital printing===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which digital printing could be incorrectly applied to a face that had no text or graphics (and included in the quote).<br />
===Text size in older files===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which, when older (4.2.x) files with text were loaded, the text size was incorrect when first loaded. <br />
===PEM nuts for thin enclosures===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Mar03, a different PEM nut is given to any enclosure (including the U Shape) with thin metal. <br />
===Wall mounts in 5-sided enclosures===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Mar03, the 5-Sided enclosure template defaults to being without wall mounts, and the '''Has Wall Mounts''' check box is cleared. <br />
===Cutout Editor===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which selecting an object in the Cutout Editor selected everything rather than just that object.<br />
==Fixes released in February 2016==<br />
===PEMs===<br />
Version 4.5.3 fixes an issue that prevented PEMs from being displayed on some older enclosure files, and an automated test was added to prevent it from recurring. <br />
===U Shape enclosures===<br />
With Version 4.5.3, U Shape enclosures are given thinner nuts when the metal demands them. <br />
===Cutout Library===<br />
*Version 4.5.3 fixes the issue introduced in Version 4.5 in which, after creating a cutout in the Cutout Library, when you clicked '''Accept and Close''', the cutout appeared to have been deleted.<br />
*Version 4.5.2 fixes the issue in which hiding non-stock PEMs in the Cutout Library caused several problems (including previews not displaying, cutouts not storing correctly, and PEM dialog problems). These issues were fixed by returning the visibility of the non-stock items. The items will be hidden again in a future release.<br />
<br />
===Installing on a Mac OSX===<br />
Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16 fixes an issue in which installation on a Mac OSX produced an error message that the download was broken. <br />
===Rackmounts===<br />
Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16 fixes the issue in which galvaneal rackmounts with mounting brackets took many minutes to load.<br />
===Displaying cutout outlines===<br />
In Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16, the option to have the 3D View show or hide outlines for cutouts was added to Preferences. <br />
<br />
==Archival Beta Release Notes==<br />
[[Fixes released in Version 4.4.9|Fixes released for Version 4.4.9]]</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Release_Notes_for_BETA_Version_4.5.3-Oct04&diff=3202Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Oct042016-10-06T13:00:54Z<p>Stownsend: /* New Features and Enhancements */</p>
<hr />
<div>===New Features and Enhancements===<br />
*'''[[3D View Measuring Tools]]'''<br><br />
:The 3D View window now includes tools for both measuring in 3D (even across multiple faces) and for annotating the model with 3D dimensions. (Click the heading for details.)<br />
*'''Wireframe View'''<br />
:You can view the 3D model in wireframe view instead of as a solid model. To toggle wireframe view on and off, choose '''View WireFrame''' from the '''View''' menu, or use the keyboard shortcut '''<Ctrl>-W'''. '''Known Limitation''': You cannot use the Measure3D or Dimension mode in wireframe view. <br />
*'''Java Runtime Environment'''<br />
:The Java Runtime Environment (JRE) has been updated from version 6 to version 8. This will be of particular interest to Mac users, since now the JRE will be bundled.<br />
*'''Automated Work Instructions'''<br />
:Behind the scenes, the Protocase Designer integration with Protocase's back office and shop floor has been further developed and streamlined. While users will not see these enhancements in Protocase Designer, the changes are fundamental to Protocase, Inc.'s continuous improvement in quality, turnaround, and price.<br />
<br />
===Software Fixes===<br />
''To be published'': A list of defects fixed since Version 4.5.3-May09,16 will soon be added to [[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|'''Software Fixes Released''']] page.<br />
===Known Issues===<br />
''To be published'': A list of known issues and limitations introduced in this version will soon be added to [[Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues|'''Known Issues''']] page.</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Release_Notes_for_BETA_Version_4.5.3-Oct04&diff=3201Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Oct042016-10-06T12:59:30Z<p>Stownsend: /* New Features and Enhancements */</p>
<hr />
<div>===New Features and Enhancements===<br />
*'''[[3D View Measuring Tools]]'''<br><br />
:The 3D View window now includes tools for both measuring in 3D (even across multiple faces) and for annotating the model with 3D dimensions. (Click the heading for details.)<br />
*'''Wireframe View'''<br />
:You can view the 3D model in wireframe view instead of as a solid model. To toggle wireframe view on and off, choose '''View WireFrame''' from the '''View''' menu, or use the keyboard shortcut '''<Ctrl>-W'''. '''Known Limitation''': You cannot use the Measure3D or Dimension mode in wireframe view. <br />
*'''Java Runtime Environment'''<br />
:The Java Runtime Environment (JRE) has been updated from version 6 to version 8. This will be of particular interest to Mac users, since now the JRE will be bundled.<br />
*'''Automated Work Instructions'''<br />
:Behind the scenes, the Designer integration with the Protocase back office and shop floor has been further developed and streamlined. While users will not see these improvements overtly, they are fundamental to Protocase's continuous improvement in quality, turnaround, and price.<br />
<br />
===Software Fixes===<br />
''To be published'': A list of defects fixed since Version 4.5.3-May09,16 will soon be added to [[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|'''Software Fixes Released''']] page.<br />
===Known Issues===<br />
''To be published'': A list of known issues and limitations introduced in this version will soon be added to [[Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues|'''Known Issues''']] page.</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Release_Notes_for_BETA_Version_4.5.3-Oct04&diff=3200Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Oct042016-10-06T12:59:13Z<p>Stownsend: /* New Features and Enhancements */</p>
<hr />
<div>===New Features and Enhancements===<br />
*'''[[3D View Measuring Tools]]'''<br><br />
:The 3D View window now includes tools for both measuring in 3D (even across multiple faces) and for annotating the model with 3D dimensions. (Click the heading for details.)<br />
*'''Wireframe View'''<br />
:You can view the 3D model in wireframe view instead of as a solid model. To toggle wireframe view on and off, choose '''View WireFrame''' from the '''View''' menu, or use the keyboard shortcut '''<Ctrl>-W'''. '''Known Limitation''': You cannot use the Measure3D or Dimension mode in wireframe view. <br />
*'''Java Runtime Environment'''<br />
:The Java Runtime Environment (JRE) has been updated from version 6 to version 8. This will be of particular interest to Mac users, since now the JRE can will be bundled.<br />
*'''Automated Work Instructions'''<br />
:Behind the scenes, the Designer integration with the Protocase back office and shop floor has been further developed and streamlined. While users will not see these improvements overtly, they are fundamental to Protocase's continuous improvement in quality, turnaround, and price.<br />
<br />
===Software Fixes===<br />
''To be published'': A list of defects fixed since Version 4.5.3-May09,16 will soon be added to [[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|'''Software Fixes Released''']] page.<br />
===Known Issues===<br />
''To be published'': A list of known issues and limitations introduced in this version will soon be added to [[Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues|'''Known Issues''']] page.</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Release_Notes_for_BETA_Version_4.5.3-Oct04&diff=3199Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Oct042016-10-06T12:58:25Z<p>Stownsend: /* New Features and Enhancements */</p>
<hr />
<div>===New Features and Enhancements===<br />
*'''[[3D View Measuring Tools]]'''<br><br />
:The 3D View window now includes tools for both measuring in 3D (even across multiple faces) and for annotating the model with 3D dimensions. (Click this title for details.)<br />
*'''Wireframe View'''<br />
:You can view the 3D model in wireframe view instead of as a solid model. '''Known Limitation''': You cannot use the Measure3D or Dimension mode in wireframe view. To toggle wireframe view on and off, choose '''View WireFrame''' from the '''View''' menu, or use the keyboard shortcut '''<Ctrl>-W'''.<br />
*'''Java Runtime Environment'''<br />
:The Java Runtime Environment (JRE) has been updated from version 6 to version 8. This will be of particular interest to Mac users, since now the JRE can will be bundled.<br />
*'''Automated Work Instructions'''<br />
:Behind the scenes, the Designer integration with the Protocase back office and shop floor has been further developed and streamlined. While users will not see these improvements overtly, they are fundamental to Protocase's continuous improvement in quality, turnaround, and price.<br />
<br />
===Software Fixes===<br />
''To be published'': A list of defects fixed since Version 4.5.3-May09,16 will soon be added to [[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|'''Software Fixes Released''']] page.<br />
===Known Issues===<br />
''To be published'': A list of known issues and limitations introduced in this version will soon be added to [[Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues|'''Known Issues''']] page.</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Release_Notes_for_BETA_Version_4.5.3-Oct04&diff=3198Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Oct042016-10-06T12:57:28Z<p>Stownsend: Created page with "===New Features and Enhancements=== *'''3D View Measuring Tools'''<br> :The 3D View window now includes tools for both measuring in 3D (even across multiple faces) and for..."</p>
<hr />
<div>===New Features and Enhancements===<br />
*'''[[3D View Measuring Tools]]'''<br><br />
:The 3D View window now includes tools for both measuring in 3D (even across multiple faces) and for annotating the model with 3D dimensions. <br />
*'''Wireframe View'''<br />
:You can view the 3D model in wireframe view instead of as a solid model. '''Known Limitation''': You cannot use the Measure3D or Dimension mode in wireframe view. To toggle wireframe view on and off, choose '''View WireFrame''' from the '''View''' menu, or use the keyboard shortcut '''<Ctrl>-W'''.<br />
*'''Java Runtime Environment'''<br />
:The Java Runtime Environment (JRE) has been updated from version 6 to version 8. This will be of particular interest to Mac users, since now the JRE can will be bundled.<br />
*'''Automated Work Instructions'''<br />
:Behind the scenes, the Designer integration with the Protocase back office and shop floor has been further developed and streamlined. While users will not see these improvements overtly, they are fundamental to Protocase's continuous improvement in quality, turnaround, and price.<br />
===Software Fixes===<br />
''To be published'': A list of defects fixed since Version 4.5.3-May09,16 will soon be added to [[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|'''Software Fixes Released''']] page.<br />
===Known Issues===<br />
''To be published'': A list of known issues and limitations introduced in this version will soon be added to [[Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues|'''Known Issues''']] page.</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Release_Notes&diff=3197Release Notes2016-10-06T12:57:11Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div><br />
'''<span style="color:#ff0000">New! October 2016</span>''' [[Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Oct04|'''Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Oct04,16''']]<br />
<br />
*[[Protocase Designer Version 4.5 Release Notes|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.5 Release Notes''' (February 2016)]]<br><br />
*[[Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Jun09|'''Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Jun09,16''']]<br><br><br><br />
=====Archival Release Notes=====<br />
*[[Protocase Designer Version 4.3.3 Release Notes|Protocase Designer Release Notes for Versions 4.4.3 & 4.4.8]]<br />
*[[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|Fixes in Beta Versions Released After Version 4.4.8]]</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released&diff=3196Knowledgebase - Software Fixes Released2016-10-05T19:32:48Z<p>Stownsend: /* Links to the latest release */</p>
<hr />
<div>__NOTOC__<br />
Fixes are documented on this page as they are released in Beta versions after the current General Release, which is Version 4.5. Links to fixes in previous Beta releases are at the bottom of this page.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Links to the latest release==<br />
The latest beta version released is [[Release_Notes_for_BETA_Version_4.5.3-Sep22|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.5.3-Sep22,16''']], except for Mac 10.6 (which still uses the Jun09 version) and Mac 10.7 (for which a link will be published soon).<br><br><br />
<br />
To begin the download, click the appropriate link below. For installation instructions, please see [[Quick Start#Installing Designer|Installing Designer]].<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-4.5.3-Sep22,16.exe '''Windows''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Jun09,16.zip '''Mac OSX 10.6 in ZIP format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Jun09,16.tar '''Mac OSX 10.6 in TAR format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Sep22.zip '''Mac OSX 10.8 in ZIP format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Sep22,16.tar '''Mac OSX 10.8 in TAR format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/jdesigner-4.5.3-Jun09,16-x64.deb '''Linux Debian amd64''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/jdesigner-4.5.3-Jun09,16-i586.deb '''Linux Debian i586''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-linux-amd64-4.5.3-Jun09,16.tar.gz '''Linux amd64''']]<br><br />
:[[http://http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-linux-i586-4.5.3-Jun09,16.tar.gz '''Linux i586''']]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Fixes released in September 2016==<br />
''A list will be published soon.''<br />
==Fixes released in May 2016==<br />
===Corners with 0.0" radii===<br />
Version 4.5.3-May06 fixes an issue in which a bracket with a 0.0" corner radius caused Designer to crash. With this release, 0.0" radii are supported. <br />
===Tapped holes for connectors===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-May06,16, the USB 3.0 A-A panel connector and USB A-A coupler use tapped holes. <br />
===Cutout Library listing===<br />
Version 4.5.3-May06,16 fixes an issue in which the Cutout Library displayed items that were not useful for customers. (Known Issue: Admin Hardware is still displayed.)<br />
<br />
==Fixes released in April 2016==<br />
===5 Sided Enclosures and Consolets===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr27,16 fixed an issue in which cutouts in older 5-sided enclosures and consolets changed position when loaded. <br />
===Text Kerning===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr27,16 implemented text ''kerning,'' in which spacing is adjusted typographically between characters in proportional fonts. Text in previous designs will be retained without kerning, so that the text layout is not changed without the user being aware of it. <br />
===Documentation===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16, the Help menus for the Face Editor and Cutout Editor contain links to the documentation. <br />
===L Shape enclosures===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16 fixed an issue in which the L Shape enclosure template did not allow room for the seam welds when '''Has Seam Welds''' was selected.<br />
===Loading older files with PEMs===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16 fixed an issue in which opening certain older enclosure designs with PEMs did not load the PEMs. <br />
<br />
==Fixes released in March 2016==<br />
===Digital printing===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which digital printing could be incorrectly applied to a face that had no text or graphics (and included in the quote).<br />
===Text size in older files===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which, when older (4.2.x) files with text were loaded, the text size was incorrect when first loaded. <br />
===PEM nuts for thin enclosures===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Mar03, a different PEM nut is given to any enclosure (including the U Shape) with thin metal. <br />
===Wall mounts in 5-sided enclosures===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Mar03, the 5-Sided enclosure template defaults to being without wall mounts, and the '''Has Wall Mounts''' check box is cleared. <br />
===Cutout Editor===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which selecting an object in the Cutout Editor selected everything rather than just that object.<br />
==Fixes released in February 2016==<br />
===PEMs===<br />
Version 4.5.3 fixes an issue that prevented PEMs from being displayed on some older enclosure files, and an automated test was added to prevent it from recurring. <br />
===U Shape enclosures===<br />
With Version 4.5.3, U Shape enclosures are given thinner nuts when the metal demands them. <br />
===Cutout Library===<br />
*Version 4.5.3 fixes the issue introduced in Version 4.5 in which, after creating a cutout in the Cutout Library, when you clicked '''Accept and Close''', the cutout appeared to have been deleted.<br />
*Version 4.5.2 fixes the issue in which hiding non-stock PEMs in the Cutout Library caused several problems (including previews not displaying, cutouts not storing correctly, and PEM dialog problems). These issues were fixed by returning the visibility of the non-stock items. The items will be hidden again in a future release.<br />
<br />
===Installing on a Mac OSX===<br />
Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16 fixes an issue in which installation on a Mac OSX produced an error message that the download was broken. <br />
===Rackmounts===<br />
Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16 fixes the issue in which galvaneal rackmounts with mounting brackets took many minutes to load.<br />
===Displaying cutout outlines===<br />
In Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16, the option to have the 3D View show or hide outlines for cutouts was added to Preferences. <br />
<br />
==Archival Beta Release Notes==<br />
[[Fixes released in Version 4.4.9|Fixes released for Version 4.4.9]]</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released&diff=3195Knowledgebase - Software Fixes Released2016-10-05T19:31:43Z<p>Stownsend: /* Links to the latest release */</p>
<hr />
<div>__NOTOC__<br />
Fixes are documented on this page as they are released in Beta versions after the current General Release, which is Version 4.5. Links to fixes in previous Beta releases are at the bottom of this page.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Links to the latest release==<br />
The latest beta version released is [[Release_Notes_for_BETA_Version_4.5.3-Sep22|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.5.3-Sep22,16''']], except for Mac 10.6 (which still uses the Jun09 beta version) and Mac 10.7 (for which a link will be published soon).<br><br><br />
<br />
To begin the download, click the appropriate link below. For installation instructions, please see [[Quick Start#Installing Designer|Installing Designer]].<br><br />
The latest version released is [[Release_Notes_for_BETA_Version_4.5.3-Sep22|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.5.3-Sep22,16''']] (except Mac 10.6 (which still uses the Jun09 version) and Mac 10.7 (for which a link will be published soon). To begin the download, click the appropriate link below. For installation instructions, please see [[Quick Start#Installing Designer|Installing Designer]].<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-4.5.3-Sep22,16.exe '''Windows''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Jun09,16.zip '''Mac OSX 10.6 in ZIP format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Jun09,16.tar '''Mac OSX 10.6 in TAR format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Sep22.zip '''Mac OSX 10.8 in ZIP format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Sep22,16.tar '''Mac OSX 10.8 in TAR format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/jdesigner-4.5.3-Jun09,16-x64.deb '''Linux Debian amd64''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/jdesigner-4.5.3-Jun09,16-i586.deb '''Linux Debian i586''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-linux-amd64-4.5.3-Jun09,16.tar.gz '''Linux amd64''']]<br><br />
:[[http://http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-linux-i586-4.5.3-Jun09,16.tar.gz '''Linux i586''']]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Fixes released in September 2016==<br />
''A list will be published soon.''<br />
==Fixes released in May 2016==<br />
===Corners with 0.0" radii===<br />
Version 4.5.3-May06 fixes an issue in which a bracket with a 0.0" corner radius caused Designer to crash. With this release, 0.0" radii are supported. <br />
===Tapped holes for connectors===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-May06,16, the USB 3.0 A-A panel connector and USB A-A coupler use tapped holes. <br />
===Cutout Library listing===<br />
Version 4.5.3-May06,16 fixes an issue in which the Cutout Library displayed items that were not useful for customers. (Known Issue: Admin Hardware is still displayed.)<br />
<br />
==Fixes released in April 2016==<br />
===5 Sided Enclosures and Consolets===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr27,16 fixed an issue in which cutouts in older 5-sided enclosures and consolets changed position when loaded. <br />
===Text Kerning===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr27,16 implemented text ''kerning,'' in which spacing is adjusted typographically between characters in proportional fonts. Text in previous designs will be retained without kerning, so that the text layout is not changed without the user being aware of it. <br />
===Documentation===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16, the Help menus for the Face Editor and Cutout Editor contain links to the documentation. <br />
===L Shape enclosures===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16 fixed an issue in which the L Shape enclosure template did not allow room for the seam welds when '''Has Seam Welds''' was selected.<br />
===Loading older files with PEMs===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16 fixed an issue in which opening certain older enclosure designs with PEMs did not load the PEMs. <br />
<br />
==Fixes released in March 2016==<br />
===Digital printing===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which digital printing could be incorrectly applied to a face that had no text or graphics (and included in the quote).<br />
===Text size in older files===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which, when older (4.2.x) files with text were loaded, the text size was incorrect when first loaded. <br />
===PEM nuts for thin enclosures===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Mar03, a different PEM nut is given to any enclosure (including the U Shape) with thin metal. <br />
===Wall mounts in 5-sided enclosures===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Mar03, the 5-Sided enclosure template defaults to being without wall mounts, and the '''Has Wall Mounts''' check box is cleared. <br />
===Cutout Editor===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which selecting an object in the Cutout Editor selected everything rather than just that object.<br />
==Fixes released in February 2016==<br />
===PEMs===<br />
Version 4.5.3 fixes an issue that prevented PEMs from being displayed on some older enclosure files, and an automated test was added to prevent it from recurring. <br />
===U Shape enclosures===<br />
With Version 4.5.3, U Shape enclosures are given thinner nuts when the metal demands them. <br />
===Cutout Library===<br />
*Version 4.5.3 fixes the issue introduced in Version 4.5 in which, after creating a cutout in the Cutout Library, when you clicked '''Accept and Close''', the cutout appeared to have been deleted.<br />
*Version 4.5.2 fixes the issue in which hiding non-stock PEMs in the Cutout Library caused several problems (including previews not displaying, cutouts not storing correctly, and PEM dialog problems). These issues were fixed by returning the visibility of the non-stock items. The items will be hidden again in a future release.<br />
<br />
===Installing on a Mac OSX===<br />
Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16 fixes an issue in which installation on a Mac OSX produced an error message that the download was broken. <br />
===Rackmounts===<br />
Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16 fixes the issue in which galvaneal rackmounts with mounting brackets took many minutes to load.<br />
===Displaying cutout outlines===<br />
In Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16, the option to have the 3D View show or hide outlines for cutouts was added to Preferences. <br />
<br />
==Archival Beta Release Notes==<br />
[[Fixes released in Version 4.4.9|Fixes released for Version 4.4.9]]</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released&diff=3194Knowledgebase - Software Fixes Released2016-10-05T19:23:32Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div>__NOTOC__<br />
Fixes are documented on this page as they are released in Beta versions after the current General Release, which is Version 4.5. Links to fixes in previous Beta releases are at the bottom of this page.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Links to the latest release==<br />
The latest beta version released is [[Release_Notes_for_BETA_Version_4.5.3-Sep22|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.5.3-Sep22,16''']], except for Mac 10.6 (which still uses the Jun09 beta version) and Mac 10.7 (for which a link will be published soon).<br><br><br />
<br />
To begin the download, click the appropriate link below. For installation instructions, please see [[Quick Start#Installing Designer|Installing Designer]].<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-4.5.3-Sep22,16.exe '''Windows''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Jun09,16.zip '''Mac OSX in ZIP format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Jun09,16.tar '''Mac OSX in TAR format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/jdesigner-4.5.3-Sep22,16-x64.deb '''Linux Debian amd64''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/jdesigner-4.5.3-Sep22,16-i586.deb '''Linux Debian i586''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-linux-amd64-4.5.3-Sep22,16.tar.gz '''Linux amd64''']]<br><br />
:[[http://http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-linux-i586-4.5.3-Sep22,16.tar.gz '''Linux i586''']]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Fixes released in September 2016==<br />
''A list will be published soon.''<br />
==Fixes released in May 2016==<br />
===Corners with 0.0" radii===<br />
Version 4.5.3-May06 fixes an issue in which a bracket with a 0.0" corner radius caused Designer to crash. With this release, 0.0" radii are supported. <br />
===Tapped holes for connectors===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-May06,16, the USB 3.0 A-A panel connector and USB A-A coupler use tapped holes. <br />
===Cutout Library listing===<br />
Version 4.5.3-May06,16 fixes an issue in which the Cutout Library displayed items that were not useful for customers. (Known Issue: Admin Hardware is still displayed.)<br />
<br />
==Fixes released in April 2016==<br />
===5 Sided Enclosures and Consolets===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr27,16 fixed an issue in which cutouts in older 5-sided enclosures and consolets changed position when loaded. <br />
===Text Kerning===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr27,16 implemented text ''kerning,'' in which spacing is adjusted typographically between characters in proportional fonts. Text in previous designs will be retained without kerning, so that the text layout is not changed without the user being aware of it. <br />
===Documentation===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16, the Help menus for the Face Editor and Cutout Editor contain links to the documentation. <br />
===L Shape enclosures===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16 fixed an issue in which the L Shape enclosure template did not allow room for the seam welds when '''Has Seam Welds''' was selected.<br />
===Loading older files with PEMs===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16 fixed an issue in which opening certain older enclosure designs with PEMs did not load the PEMs. <br />
<br />
==Fixes released in March 2016==<br />
===Digital printing===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which digital printing could be incorrectly applied to a face that had no text or graphics (and included in the quote).<br />
===Text size in older files===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which, when older (4.2.x) files with text were loaded, the text size was incorrect when first loaded. <br />
===PEM nuts for thin enclosures===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Mar03, a different PEM nut is given to any enclosure (including the U Shape) with thin metal. <br />
===Wall mounts in 5-sided enclosures===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Mar03, the 5-Sided enclosure template defaults to being without wall mounts, and the '''Has Wall Mounts''' check box is cleared. <br />
===Cutout Editor===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which selecting an object in the Cutout Editor selected everything rather than just that object.<br />
==Fixes released in February 2016==<br />
===PEMs===<br />
Version 4.5.3 fixes an issue that prevented PEMs from being displayed on some older enclosure files, and an automated test was added to prevent it from recurring. <br />
===U Shape enclosures===<br />
With Version 4.5.3, U Shape enclosures are given thinner nuts when the metal demands them. <br />
===Cutout Library===<br />
*Version 4.5.3 fixes the issue introduced in Version 4.5 in which, after creating a cutout in the Cutout Library, when you clicked '''Accept and Close''', the cutout appeared to have been deleted.<br />
*Version 4.5.2 fixes the issue in which hiding non-stock PEMs in the Cutout Library caused several problems (including previews not displaying, cutouts not storing correctly, and PEM dialog problems). These issues were fixed by returning the visibility of the non-stock items. The items will be hidden again in a future release.<br />
<br />
===Installing on a Mac OSX===<br />
Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16 fixes an issue in which installation on a Mac OSX produced an error message that the download was broken. <br />
===Rackmounts===<br />
Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16 fixes the issue in which galvaneal rackmounts with mounting brackets took many minutes to load.<br />
===Displaying cutout outlines===<br />
In Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16, the option to have the 3D View show or hide outlines for cutouts was added to Preferences. <br />
<br />
==Archival Beta Release Notes==<br />
[[Fixes released in Version 4.4.9|Fixes released for Version 4.4.9]]</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released&diff=3193Knowledgebase - Software Fixes Released2016-10-05T19:22:34Z<p>Stownsend: /* Links to the latest release */</p>
<hr />
<div>__NOTOC__<br />
Fixes are documented on this page as they are released in Beta versions after the current General Release, which is Version 4.5. Links to fixes in previous Beta releases are at the bottom of this page.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Links to the latest release==<br />
The latest beta version released is [[Release_Notes_for_BETA_Version_4.5.3-Sep22|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.5.3-Sep22,16''']], except for Mac 10.6 (which still uses the Jun09 beta version) and Mac 10.7 (for which a link will be published soon).<br><br><br />
<br />
To begin the download, click the appropriate link below. For installation instructions, please see [[Quick Start#Installing Designer|Installing Designer]].<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-4.5.3-Sep22,16.exe '''Windows''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Jun09,16.zip '''Mac OSX in ZIP format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Jun09,16.tar '''Mac OSX in TAR format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/jdesigner-4.5.3-Sep22,16-x64.deb '''Linux Debian amd64''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/jdesigner-4.5.3-Sep22,16-i586.deb '''Linux Debian i586''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-linux-amd64-4.5.3-Sep22,16.tar.gz '''Linux amd64''']]<br><br />
:[[http://http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-linux-i586-4.5.3-Sep22,16.tar.gz '''Linux i586''']]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Fixes released in May 2016==<br />
===Corners with 0.0" radii===<br />
Version 4.5.3-May06 fixes an issue in which a bracket with a 0.0" corner radius caused Designer to crash. With this release, 0.0" radii are supported. <br />
===Tapped holes for connectors===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-May06,16, the USB 3.0 A-A panel connector and USB A-A coupler use tapped holes. <br />
===Cutout Library listing===<br />
Version 4.5.3-May06,16 fixes an issue in which the Cutout Library displayed items that were not useful for customers. (Known Issue: Admin Hardware is still displayed.)<br />
<br />
==Fixes released in April 2016==<br />
===5 Sided Enclosures and Consolets===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr27,16 fixed an issue in which cutouts in older 5-sided enclosures and consolets changed position when loaded. <br />
===Text Kerning===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr27,16 implemented text ''kerning,'' in which spacing is adjusted typographically between characters in proportional fonts. Text in previous designs will be retained without kerning, so that the text layout is not changed without the user being aware of it. <br />
===Documentation===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16, the Help menus for the Face Editor and Cutout Editor contain links to the documentation. <br />
===L Shape enclosures===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16 fixed an issue in which the L Shape enclosure template did not allow room for the seam welds when '''Has Seam Welds''' was selected.<br />
===Loading older files with PEMs===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16 fixed an issue in which opening certain older enclosure designs with PEMs did not load the PEMs. <br />
<br />
==Fixes released in March 2016==<br />
===Digital printing===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which digital printing could be incorrectly applied to a face that had no text or graphics (and included in the quote).<br />
===Text size in older files===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which, when older (4.2.x) files with text were loaded, the text size was incorrect when first loaded. <br />
===PEM nuts for thin enclosures===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Mar03, a different PEM nut is given to any enclosure (including the U Shape) with thin metal. <br />
===Wall mounts in 5-sided enclosures===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Mar03, the 5-Sided enclosure template defaults to being without wall mounts, and the '''Has Wall Mounts''' check box is cleared. <br />
===Cutout Editor===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which selecting an object in the Cutout Editor selected everything rather than just that object.<br />
==Fixes released in February 2016==<br />
===PEMs===<br />
Version 4.5.3 fixes an issue that prevented PEMs from being displayed on some older enclosure files, and an automated test was added to prevent it from recurring. <br />
===U Shape enclosures===<br />
With Version 4.5.3, U Shape enclosures are given thinner nuts when the metal demands them. <br />
===Cutout Library===<br />
*Version 4.5.3 fixes the issue introduced in Version 4.5 in which, after creating a cutout in the Cutout Library, when you clicked '''Accept and Close''', the cutout appeared to have been deleted.<br />
*Version 4.5.2 fixes the issue in which hiding non-stock PEMs in the Cutout Library caused several problems (including previews not displaying, cutouts not storing correctly, and PEM dialog problems). These issues were fixed by returning the visibility of the non-stock items. The items will be hidden again in a future release.<br />
<br />
===Installing on a Mac OSX===<br />
Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16 fixes an issue in which installation on a Mac OSX produced an error message that the download was broken. <br />
===Rackmounts===<br />
Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16 fixes the issue in which galvaneal rackmounts with mounting brackets took many minutes to load.<br />
===Displaying cutout outlines===<br />
In Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16, the option to have the 3D View show or hide outlines for cutouts was added to Preferences. <br />
<br />
==Archival Beta Release Notes==<br />
[[Fixes released in Version 4.4.9|Fixes released for Version 4.4.9]]</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released&diff=3192Knowledgebase - Software Fixes Released2016-10-05T19:20:38Z<p>Stownsend: /* Links to the latest release */</p>
<hr />
<div>__NOTOC__<br />
Fixes are documented on this page as they are released in Beta versions after the current General Release, which is Version 4.5. Links to fixes in previous Beta releases are at the bottom of this page.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Links to the latest release==<br />
The latest beta version released is [[Release_Notes_for_BETA_Version_4.5.3-Sep22|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.5.3-Sep22,16''']], except for Mac 10.6 users (who will still use the Jun09 beta version) and Mac 10.7 users (for whom a link will be published soon).<br><br><br />
<br />
To begin the download, click the appropriate link below. For installation instructions, please see [[Quick Start#Installing Designer|Installing Designer]].<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-4.5.3-Sep22,16.exe '''Windows''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Jun09,16.zip '''Mac OSX in ZIP format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Jun09,16.tar '''Mac OSX in TAR format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/jdesigner-4.5.3-Sep22,16-x64.deb '''Linux Debian amd64''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/jdesigner-4.5.3-Sep22,16-i586.deb '''Linux Debian i586''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-linux-amd64-4.5.3-Sep22,16.tar.gz '''Linux amd64''']]<br><br />
:[[http://http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-linux-i586-4.5.3-Sep22,16.tar.gz '''Linux i586''']]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Fixes released in May 2016==<br />
===Corners with 0.0" radii===<br />
Version 4.5.3-May06 fixes an issue in which a bracket with a 0.0" corner radius caused Designer to crash. With this release, 0.0" radii are supported. <br />
===Tapped holes for connectors===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-May06,16, the USB 3.0 A-A panel connector and USB A-A coupler use tapped holes. <br />
===Cutout Library listing===<br />
Version 4.5.3-May06,16 fixes an issue in which the Cutout Library displayed items that were not useful for customers. (Known Issue: Admin Hardware is still displayed.)<br />
<br />
==Fixes released in April 2016==<br />
===5 Sided Enclosures and Consolets===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr27,16 fixed an issue in which cutouts in older 5-sided enclosures and consolets changed position when loaded. <br />
===Text Kerning===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr27,16 implemented text ''kerning,'' in which spacing is adjusted typographically between characters in proportional fonts. Text in previous designs will be retained without kerning, so that the text layout is not changed without the user being aware of it. <br />
===Documentation===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16, the Help menus for the Face Editor and Cutout Editor contain links to the documentation. <br />
===L Shape enclosures===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16 fixed an issue in which the L Shape enclosure template did not allow room for the seam welds when '''Has Seam Welds''' was selected.<br />
===Loading older files with PEMs===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16 fixed an issue in which opening certain older enclosure designs with PEMs did not load the PEMs. <br />
<br />
==Fixes released in March 2016==<br />
===Digital printing===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which digital printing could be incorrectly applied to a face that had no text or graphics (and included in the quote).<br />
===Text size in older files===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which, when older (4.2.x) files with text were loaded, the text size was incorrect when first loaded. <br />
===PEM nuts for thin enclosures===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Mar03, a different PEM nut is given to any enclosure (including the U Shape) with thin metal. <br />
===Wall mounts in 5-sided enclosures===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Mar03, the 5-Sided enclosure template defaults to being without wall mounts, and the '''Has Wall Mounts''' check box is cleared. <br />
===Cutout Editor===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which selecting an object in the Cutout Editor selected everything rather than just that object.<br />
==Fixes released in February 2016==<br />
===PEMs===<br />
Version 4.5.3 fixes an issue that prevented PEMs from being displayed on some older enclosure files, and an automated test was added to prevent it from recurring. <br />
===U Shape enclosures===<br />
With Version 4.5.3, U Shape enclosures are given thinner nuts when the metal demands them. <br />
===Cutout Library===<br />
*Version 4.5.3 fixes the issue introduced in Version 4.5 in which, after creating a cutout in the Cutout Library, when you clicked '''Accept and Close''', the cutout appeared to have been deleted.<br />
*Version 4.5.2 fixes the issue in which hiding non-stock PEMs in the Cutout Library caused several problems (including previews not displaying, cutouts not storing correctly, and PEM dialog problems). These issues were fixed by returning the visibility of the non-stock items. The items will be hidden again in a future release.<br />
<br />
===Installing on a Mac OSX===<br />
Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16 fixes an issue in which installation on a Mac OSX produced an error message that the download was broken. <br />
===Rackmounts===<br />
Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16 fixes the issue in which galvaneal rackmounts with mounting brackets took many minutes to load.<br />
===Displaying cutout outlines===<br />
In Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16, the option to have the 3D View show or hide outlines for cutouts was added to Preferences. <br />
<br />
==Archival Beta Release Notes==<br />
[[Fixes released in Version 4.4.9|Fixes released for Version 4.4.9]]</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Release_Notes&diff=3188Release Notes2016-10-05T19:04:26Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div><br />
'''<span style="color:#ff0000">New! September 2016</span>''' [[Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Sep22|'''Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Sep22,16''']]<br />
<br />
*[[Protocase Designer Version 4.5 Release Notes|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.5 Release Notes''' (February 2016)]]<br><br />
*[[Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Jun09|'''Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Jun09,16''']]<br><br><br><br />
=====Archival Release Notes=====<br />
*[[Protocase Designer Version 4.3.3 Release Notes|Protocase Designer Release Notes for Versions 4.4.3 & 4.4.8]]<br />
*[[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|Fixes in Beta Versions Released After Version 4.4.8]]</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Status_bar_ENLARGED_DETAIL.png&diff=3178File:Status bar ENLARGED DETAIL.png2016-10-04T14:55:50Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Status_bar_temp_image.png&diff=3176File:Status bar temp image.png2016-10-04T14:49:54Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Release_Notes_for_BETA_Version_4.5.3-Jun09&diff=3175Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Jun092016-10-04T13:53:14Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div>The BETA Version 4.5.3-Jun09,16 release adds enhancements to the 3D View window, as summarized below. Detailed release notes will be published on this page very soon! <br />
[[File:3d-view_window_oct03ANNOTATED.png]]</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:3d-view_window_oct03ANNOTATED.png&diff=3172File:3d-view window oct03ANNOTATED.png2016-10-04T13:50:37Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Release_Notes_for_BETA_Version_4.5.3-Jun09&diff=3171Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Jun092016-10-04T13:43:37Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div>The BETA Version 4.5.3-Jun09,16 release adds enhancements to the 3D View window, as summarized below. Detailed release notes will be published on this page very soon! <br />
[[File:3DView_window_30-Sept2016_annotated.png]]</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&diff=3160Face Editor2016-09-30T14:57:14Z<p>Stownsend: /* Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly */</p>
<hr />
<div>=Face Editor overview=<br />
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure. <br />
<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels3.png|1000px|Face Editor Window]]<br />
<br />
;2D Menu bar<br />
:Contains File, Edit, Cutout Library and Fasteners, Grid, View, Graphics, and Help menus. <br />
<br />
;2D Standard toolbar<br />
:Contains common commands such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, and Zoom.<br />
<br />
;2D Mode toolbar<br />
:Contains tools to add shapes, text, and images to the face, as well as exclusion and masking zones and construction lines.<br />
<br />
;2D Viewport<br />
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.<br />
<br />
;2D Status bar<br />
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.<br />
<br />
;2D Properties panel<br />
:Displays context-sensitive Help and properties that can be changed for the selected object.<br><br><br />
<br />
===2D Standard Toolbar===<br />
[[File:2D-toolbar.png]]<br><br><br />
From left to right, the buttons are:<br />
{|<br />
| [[File:Button-acceptclose.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Accept'''<br />
| Accept changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Reject button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Reject'''<br />
| Reject changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Cut.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Cut'''<br />
| Cut object(s).<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Copy.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Copy'''<br />
| Copy object(s).<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Paste.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Paste'''<br />
| Paste object(s) that have been cut or copied.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-PartView.png|30px|top]]<br />
| '''Part View'''<br />
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which lists each part, face, and design element: <br />
|-<br />
|<br />
|<br />
| [[File:Window-parttree-ushape-note.png|300px]]<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Zoom_In_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Zoom In'''<br />
|Zoom in on the face. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Zoom Out'''<br />
| Zoom out from the face. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Reset_View_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Reset View'''<br />
| Zoom out from the face. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-togglegrid.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Toggle Grid'''<br />
| Toggle on/off the grid display. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-gridsize.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Grid Size'''<br />
| Change the grid size. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-snapgrid.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Snap to Grid'''<br />
| Toggle on/off snapping to the grid. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Keyslot_undo_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Undo'''<br />
| Undo your last action. .<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Redo_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Redo'''<br />
| Repeat your last action. .<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-ViewBack.png|bottom]]<br />
| '''Back'''<br />
| Display the back of the face. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-ViewFront.png|bottom]]<br />
| '''Front'''<br />
| Display the front of the face.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Draw.png|bottom]]<br />
| '''Draw'''<br />
| When dragging the mouse, act on objects (draw, move, etc.). <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Pan.png|bottom]]<br />
| '''Pan'''<br />
| When dragging the mouse, do not act on objects but just pan the face. <br />
|}<br><br><br />
<br />
===Face Editor preferences===<br />
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].<br><br><br />
<br />
=Viewing the face=<br />
<br />
==Panning==<br />
To pan the model or face, do one of the following:<br />
*In the 3D View:<br />
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the model.<br />
::''or''<br />
:*Hold down the <Alt> key, then drag the model.<br><br><br />
*In the Face Editor:<br />
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the face.<br />
::''or''<br />
:*Click and hold down the mouse wheel-button while dragging the face.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Zooming==<br />
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.<br />
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.<br />
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following. <br />
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Zoom_In_button.png|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.<br />
:*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' > '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom.<br><br />
*To zoom in on a particular area:<br />
*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Resetting the view==<br />
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:<br />
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset_View_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.<br />
*Choose '''View''' > '''Reset Zoom'''.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Viewing the front or back of the face==<br />
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, choose '''View''' > '''Toggle Side Showing'''. <br><br />
[[File:Toggle-Side-Showing-command.png|175px]]<br><br />
Or, you can use the 2D Standard toolbar buttons to display either side:<br />
*To display the back of the face, click the '''Inside''' [[File:button-inside.png]] or '''Back''' [[File:Button-ViewBack.png]] button. <br />
*To display the front of the face, click the '''Outside''' [[File:Button-Outside.png]] or '''Front''' [[File:Button-ViewFront.png]] button. <br />
(If an enclosure is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Inside''' and '''Outside'''. If a panel is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Back''' and '''Front'''.) Whichever button you click becomes shaded to indicate that it is in effect.<br />
<br />
=Coordinate System=<br />
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.<br />
<br />
[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]]<br><br><br />
<br />
===Choosing the Units of Measure===<br />
<br />
You can set the default unit of measure. <br />
<br />
#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.<br />
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.<br />
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM). <br />
#Click '''OK.'''<br><br><br><br />
<br />
=Drawing shapes=<br />
<br />
==Selecting the drawing (object) type==<br />
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''.<br><br />
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the "Mode" label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''.<br><br />
#:[[File:button-mode.png||60px|bottom]]<br><br />
#:The Draw Type window opens:<br><br />
#:[[File:Mode_menu.png]]<br><br />
#Click the button that you want to use as the default. The button label changes to indicate the current object type.<br><br><br />
<br />
===Using the Cutout object type===<br />
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera.<br><br />
'''See Also:'''<br />
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]<br><br><br />
<br />
===Using the Graphic object type===<br />
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.<br />
<br />
====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====<br />
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.<br />
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press <Enter>. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.). <br />
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:<br />
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is "None"; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.<br />
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads. <br />
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish. <br />
:*The printed area must be no more than 46"x46", and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24" high.<br />
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface. <br />
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed.<br><br />
<br />
=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====<br />
#Choose '''Edit''' > '''Preferences'''.<br />
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:<br />
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)<br />
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)<br />
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to "Graphic" for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.) <br />
#Click '''OK'''.<br><br />
<br />
=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====<br />
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change. <br />
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu. <br />
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face.<br><br />
'''See Also:''' <br />
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]<br />
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]]<br><br><br />
<br />
===Using the Exclusion object type===<br />
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.<br />
<br />
===Using the Masking object type===<br />
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust.<br><br />
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.<br />
#:[[File:Select_Draw_Type_masking.png|400px]]<br />
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked.<br><br />
'''Notes'''<br><br />
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.<br />
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1".<br><br><br />
<br />
===Using the Construct object type===<br />
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing circles==<br />
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.<br />
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.<br />
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|30px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing ellipses==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.<br />
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.<br />
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|30px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing rectangles and squares==<br />
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.<br />
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.<br />
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|30px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing custom paths==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path.png|30px]].<br />
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.<br />
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Creating an arc using the Path tool====<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.<br />
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment). <br />
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press <a>.<br />
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.<br />
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer. <br />
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size. <br />
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing <A>). <br />
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.)<br><br><br />
<br />
====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====<br />
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.<br />
<br />
'''''To merge two or more objects'''''<br />
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object. <br />
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE1.jpg]]<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.) <br />
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE2.jpg]]<br />
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu. <br />
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE3.jpg]]<br />
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout. <br />
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE4.jpg]]<br><br><br />
'''''To edit a merged object'''''<br><br />
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right. <br />
:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE5.jpg]] [[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE6.jpg]]<br><br><br />
'''Note''' If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. <br><br><br />
'''''To trim two or more objects'''''<br><br />
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.<br />
#Place a circle on the face.<br />
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it. <br />
#:[[File:example-Trim1.jpg]]<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.<br />
#:[[File:example-Trim2.jpg]]<br />
#Click the '''Trim''' button.<br />
#:The outline of each object is outlined, the cursor icon turns into an eraser (not shown in these examples).<br />
#:[[File:example-Trim3.jpg]]<br />
#Use the eraser to eliminate the lines you do not want.<br />
#:[[File:example-Trim4.jpg]]<br />
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode. <span style="color:#ff0000">'''Important!'''</span> If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved.<br> <br />
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such. <br />
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]<br />
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:<br />
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1.jpg]]<br><br />
'''See Also: '''<br />
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]<br />
<br />
<br />
====Solving problems with merging objects====<br />
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.<br />
<br><br><br />
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom:<br><br />
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1.jpg]]<br><br />
If you then merge them and click <Esc>, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view. <br />
<br><br><br />
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic. <br />
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle. <br />
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2.jpg]]<br />
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well. <br />
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:<br />
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3.jpg|300px]]<br />
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4.jpg|300px]]<br />
#When completed, click the <Esc> key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing lines==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.<br />
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.<br />
#Drag to set the end of the line.<br />
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing arcs==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.<br />
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc. <br />
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc. <br />
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc. <br />
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding text==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.<br />
#Click on the face and begin typing.<br />
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''<Enter>''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time. <br />
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. <br />
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''', and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Adding special characters====<br />
You can add any special character such as the registered trademark symbol to text, as follows. (The <Alt> character code method is not supported.) <br />
#Copy the character from any site such as [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script Wikipedia] or from the Character Map application in Windows. <br />
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:<br />
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example.png|border|500px]]<br />
#:'''Tip''' The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:<br />
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example2.png|border|500px]]<br><br><br />
<br />
'''See Also'''<br><br />
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]'''<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding images==<br />
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF). Vector files (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed. '''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/ '''Spotting the Difference'''].<br><br />
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].<br />
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:image_button.png|50px]] on the Mode toolbar.<br />
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed. <br />
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.) <br />
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:<br />
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).<br />
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received. <br />
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves. <br />
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.<br />
'''Notes''': <br><br />
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer. <br />
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins. <br><br><br />
====Exporting images====<br />
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.<br />
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export. <br />
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens. <br />
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. <br><br><br />
<br />
=Using the Measure tool=<br />
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one.<br> <br />
'''See Also:'''<br />
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]<br />
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure.png|40px|bottom]]<br />
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). <br />
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.<br />
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1.png|600px]]<br><br><br />
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br />
<br />
==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==<br />
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure.png|40px|bottom]]<br />
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.<br />
#Click the centre of the circle cutout. <br />
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.<br />
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure1.png|500px]]<br />
#Enter "5" in '''x difference''' and "-3" in '''y difference'''.<br />
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)<br />
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure-moved1.png|500px]]<br><br />
<br />
==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==<br />
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object. <br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure.png|40px|bottom]]<br />
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). <br />
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points. <br />
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1.png|500 px]]<br />
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of "1" and an '''x difference''' of "1".<br />
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel.<br><br />
<br />
==Displaying measurements==<br />
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes.<br><br><br />
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points'''''<br><br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:button-Dimension-ModePanel-FaceEditor.jpg|40px|bottom]]<br />
#:The distance of "0.000" is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint. <br />
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor. <br />
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed. <br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-1.jpg|border]]<br />
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.<br />
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green. <br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-2.jpg|border]]<br />
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:<br />
#::The distance between the two points;<br />
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and<br />
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).<br />
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure. <br />
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed. The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle. <br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-3.jpg|border]]<br />
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse. <br />
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way. <br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-4.jpg|border]]<br />
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:<br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-5.jpg|border]]<br />
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:<br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-6.jpg|border]]<br><br><br />
<br />
'''''To delete a displayed measurement'''''<br><br />
Do either of the following:<br />
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu. <br />
*Highlight the line and press the <Delete> key.<br><br><br />
'''''See Also''''' <br />
*[[Face Editor#Measuring distances|Using the Measure tool]]<br><br><br />
<br />
=Using the grid=<br />
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects.<br><br><br />
<br />
Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel. <br />
<br />
===Turn on/off the Grid===<br />
#Do one of the following:<br />
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid.png|bottom]]<br />
#*On the Grid menu, select '''Toggle Grid'''.<br />
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.<br />
{{Note|The '''Snap to Grid''' option is automatically enabled when the grid is turned on.}}<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid.png|600px|thumb|left|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]<br />
<br clear=all><br />
<br />
===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===<br />
'''Note: Snap to Grid''' is automatically enabled when the grid is turned on.<br><br />
#Do one of the following:<br />
#*On the Standard toolbar, click '''Snap to Grid''' [[File:button-snapgrid.png|bottom]]<br />
#*On the Grid menu, click '''Snap to Grid'''.<br />
#Repeat to toggle the state of '''Snap to Grid'''.<br><br><br />
<br />
===Changing grid size and offset===<br />
#On the Standard toolbar, click [[File:button-gridsize.png|bottom]] or choose '''Grid Size''' from the '''Grid''' menu.<br />
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:<br />
:[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize.png|left]]<br />
<br clear=all> <br />
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.<br />
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.<br />
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.<br />
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.<br />
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.<br />
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.<br />
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset.png|500px|thumb|left|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]<br />
<br clear=all><br />
<br />
=Managing object properties=<br />
<br />
[[File:top_of_properties_panel.jpg|thumb|Top of Properties panel]]<br />
<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkcreened circle]]<br />
<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkscreened text]]<br />
<br />
===Top of Properties Panel===<br />
* Click the line that reads "Click to Expand Context Help" to read usage tips for the current object you are editing (circle, ellipse, text, etcetera). Click anywhere in the upper panel again to hide the help. <br />
* For help on the Layers buttons and its toolbar, please see [[Face Editor#Adding and managing layers|Adding and managing layers]].<br />
* The checkbox "On This Side" is selected when the object is on the side that you are editing. Clear the check box to move the object to the other side of the face. <br />
<br />
*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.<br />
<br />
===Fill===<br />
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.<br />
<br />
===Line Thickness===<br />
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.<br />
<br />
===Color===<br />
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu. <br />
<br />
===Type===<br />
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.<br />
* Object types include:<br />
:Cutout<br />
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)<br />
:Exclusion<br />
:Construct<br />
<br />
===Origin===<br />
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.<br />
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.<br />
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.<br />
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:<br />
:'''Circles''' -- centre<br />
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre<br />
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin<br />
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner<br />
:'''Paths''' -- start point<br />
:'''Lines''' -- start point<br />
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner<br><br />
'''See Also'''<br><br />
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]<br />
<br />
===Circles===<br />
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.<br />
===Ellipses===<br />
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).<br />
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).<br />
===Rectangles===<br />
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.<br />
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise<br />
===Lines===<br />
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.<br />
===Images===<br />
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.<br />
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise<br />
===Text===<br />
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise<br />
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].<br />
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.<br />
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.<br />
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.<br />
<br />
===Path===<br />
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding notes==<br />
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering & Design Services team. For example:<br />
* "Round the corners of this rectangle to a radius of .05 inches." <br />
* "Put a hinged door over this cutout." <br />
* "Put rubber feet on this face.”<br />
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering & Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering & Design Services will give you the correct quote.<br><br><br />
'''''To add a note to an object'''''<br />
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note. <br />
#Type the note in the blank text window in the Properties panel. When done, click either arrow above the text box, or any other tool in the Properties panel. <br />
#;[[File:notes_tools_in_face_editor.jpg]]<br />
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.<br />
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time.<br><br><br />
'''''To add a general note'''''<br />
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' [[File:3D_View_-_Part_Tree_button.png|40px]] button.<br />
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.<br />
#Type the note in the bottom text window. In the following example, a note was added to the assembly. <br />
#;[[File:Assembly_Tree_example.png|400px]]<br />
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it.<br><br><br />
'''''To delete a note'''''<br />
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button.<br><br><br />
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''<br />
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View > View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance. <br />
#:[[File:view_notes_window.jpg|500 px]]<br />
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Adding cutouts=<br />
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure.<br><br />
'''See Also:'''<br><br />
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]<br />
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]]<br><br><br />
<br />
===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===<br />
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library. <br />
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''.<br />
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description. <br />
#;[[File:library_manager.jpg|600px]]<br />
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout. <br />
#;[[File:Cursor_changes_when_click_place_item_button.jpg|300px]]<br />
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.<br />
#;[[File:Cursor_stays_to_place_item_multiple_times.jpg|300px]]<br />
#When you are done, press <Esc> or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.<br><br><br />
<br />
===Adding a cutout by selecting it from the Cutout Library and Fasteners menu===<br />
Use this method when you know exactly which cutout you want to load.<br />
#In the Face Editor, drill down through the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''main library''' or '''personal library''' listings, and click on the name of the cutout that you want to load. <br />
#;[[File:Adding cutouts menu.jpg|600px]]<br><br />
#The cursor changes to an image of the cutout; click each location on the face where you want to place the cutout. <br />
#When you are done, press <Esc> or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding "D" port cutouts==<br />
You can add a "D"-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.<br />
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel. <br />
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it. <br />
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding cutouts that cross the edge of a face==<br />
You can configure Designer to allow you to choose to cut the edge of the face when placing an object across a face boundary. <br />
#In [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''']], set '''Error Response''' to ''ASK.'' This will cause Designer to prompt you to choose whether to accept or reject the placement when you draw or move a cutout so that it lies across the boundary.<br />
#Also in Preferences, clear the '''Cut Face''' check box. (If you select the check box, Designer will not give you a choice, but will automatically cut the boundary.)<br />
#;[[File:Cut-face preferences.png]]<br />
#Click '''OK''' to save the Preferences settings. <br />
#:From now on, when you draw or move an object across a boundary, you receive the prompt, as shown below when a rectangle is being created across the panel's top.<br><br />
#:[[File:cut_face_prompt.png]]<br><br />
#:If you choose '''Accept and Cut Face''', the face is cut accordingly:<br><br />
#:[[File:After-cutting-face.png]]<br><br><br />
<br />
=Adding hardware=<br />
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles. <br />
<br />
==Adding self-clinching fasteners==<br />
Protocase uses PEM<sup><small>®</small></sup> brand self-clinching fasteners.<br />
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.<br />
#:The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens. <br />
#:[[File:self-clinching_fastener_selection_dialog.jpg|300px]]<br />
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.<br />
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)<br />
#Select the thread '''Length'''. <br />
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed. <br />
#Select a '''Part Number'''. <br />
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature.<br><br />
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with "ZI".) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones. <br />
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.<br />
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Edit''' button [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press the '''Esc''' key.<br />
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-pem.png|400px|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]<br><br><br />
#:[[File:window-main-pem.png|400px|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]<br><br />
'''See Also''':<br><br />
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding hardware such as handles==<br />
#On the Standard toolbar, click '''Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show and snap to the grid.<br />
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library''', point to '''Hardware''', then select a hardware item.<br />
#When you are done adding hardware, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]].<br />
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles.png|600px|Placing handles]]<br />
#:[[File:window-main-ushape-handles.png|600px|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]<br />
<br />
==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==<br />
====Adding a countersink to a face====<br />
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole. <br />
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel. <br />
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.<br />
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-countersink.png|border]]<br />
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.<br />
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of "100.0° #2" indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)<br />
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.<br />
#;[[File:message-incorrect-cutout-size.png]]<br />
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.<br />
#:[[File:countersink.png]]<br><br><br />
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.<br><br />
<br />
'''''Adding multiple countersinks to a face'''''<br />
*To add multiple countersinks to a face at one time, draw a circle for each hole, click the '''Edit''' button, select all circles, and then click the '''Countersink''' check box.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Adding a tapped hole to a face====<br />
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.<br />
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole. <br />
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box. <br />
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.<br />
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-tapped_hole.png|border]]<br />
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.<br />
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of "2-56 [0.07]" indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07" for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.<br />
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.) <br />
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face.<br><br />
#:[[File:Tapped_hole_in_face_editor.png]]<br><br />
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.<br />
<br><br />
<br />
'''''Adding multiple tapped holes to a face'''''<br />
*To add multiple tapped holes to a face at one time, draw a circle for each hole, click the '''Edit''' button, select all circles, and then click the '''Tapped Hole''' check box.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Adding screws to a face====<br />
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''. <br />
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.<br />
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Replacing screws and PEMs====<br />
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)<br />
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the screw. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it. <br />
#In the Properties panel, notice the new '''Replace...''' button, which includes the part name of the screw. (Only part of the part name is visible on the button; to read the entire name, hover over the button.)<br />
#;[[file:SCREW_INFO.jpg|400px]]<br />
#To replace the screw with a PEM (or a PEM with another PEM), click the button. The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the '''Thread Type''' and '''Part Number''', and then click the '''Place PEM''' button. <br />
''Alternate method'': Right-click a screw and choose '''Properties''' to review and/or replace the screw with a PEM. The Properties window also lets you edit the '''Origin(X)''', '''Origin(Y)''', '''Rotation''', and the side of the face that the screw sticks up out of.<br />
<br />
==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==<br />
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure.<br><br><br />
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''<br />
#Click '''New'''.<br />
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens. <br />
#:[[File:dialog-Brackets_NewAssemblyFromTemplate.jpg|400 px]]<br />
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary. <br />
#:[[File:New4.4.9-Dialog-Brackets-NewAssemblySPECS.jpg|400 px]]<br />
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button. <br />
#:The 3D View window opens.<br />
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the '''Cutout Library Manager''' menu.<br />
#You are prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure); click '''OK''' and then do so. <br />
#:The New Library Item dialog opens. <br />
#:[[File:New_library_item_dialog.jpg|200 px]]<br />
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:<br />
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is "L Bracket by Base - Bottom". ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''<br />
#:'''Part Number''' <br />
#:'''Description''' <br />
#Click '''OK.'''<br />
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.<br><br />
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face.<br><br />
<br />
'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''<br />
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.<br />
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.) <br />
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.<br />
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure. <br />
#Click the '''Place Item''' button. <br />
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon. <br />
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Manipulating objects=<br />
==Selecting object(s)==<br />
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]<br />
#Do one of the following:<br />
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.<br />
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.<br />
#*To select multiple objects:<br />
#**Click the first object, then down the <Shift> key and click the other objects; or<br />
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects. <br />
#::[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection.png|500px]]<br />
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.<br />
#:[[File:selected_objects.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
==Editing object(s)==<br />
'''''To edit a single object'''''<br><br />
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''. <br />
''or''<br />
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type. <br />
<br><br />
'''''To edit a group'''''<br><br />
You can edit the group as a whole, or you can edit each individual object in the group. To edit the group as a whole, follow the instructions above for a single object. To edit individual objects in a group:<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button in the Properties panel.<br />
#;[[file:editing_a_group1.jpg|border]]<br />
#The group of objects is displayed in the Cutout Editor. This screen is like the Face Editor, but only the group of objects is displayed. You can now edit any of the individual objects in the group.<br />
#;[[file:editing_a_group2.jpg|600px]]<br />
#When you are finished editing the objects in the group, click '''Accept and Close''' [[File:button-acceptclose.png|20px|bottom]] in the Face Editor toolbar. The Cutout Editor closes, and the group is displayed as usual in the Face Editor.<br><br />
'''See Also'''<br />
*To ungroup the items, edit them individually, then regroup the items without leaving the Face Editor, see [[Face_Editor#Group_and_ungroup_objects|Grouping and ungrouping objects]].<br><br><br />
<br />
==Moving object(s)==<br />
To move a single object:<br><br />
#Select the object.<br />
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.<br><br><br />
<br />
To move several objects:<br><br />
#Select all the objects.<br />
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.<br><br><br />
<br />
To move cutouts from one face to another:<br />
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items. <br />
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with. <br />
:For detailed instructions, see:<br />
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]<br />
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Grouping and ungrouping objects==<br />
'''''To group objects'''''<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.<br />
#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the <Shift> key and select each object. <br />
#Click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. <br><br />
'''''To ungroup objects'''''<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.<br />
#Click the group.<br />
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel.<br><br />
'''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement.<br><br><br />
'''See Also'''<br />
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]<br />
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Aligning and distributing objects==<br />
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.<br />
<br />
#Select 2 or more objects.<br />
#In the Properties panel, click an Alignment or Distribute command.<br><br />
'''Alignment'''<br><br />
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects<br><br />
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects<br><br />
<br><br />
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects<br><br />
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects<br><br />
<br><br />
'''''Notes:'''''<br />
*Objects align to the first object selected.<br />
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align.png|600px|thumb|left|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]<br><br />
<br clear=all> <br />
<br />
'''Distribute'''<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects<br><br />
<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects<br><br><br />
<br />
==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select one or more objects.<br />
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button [[File:Button-Cut.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' > '''Cut'''. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button [[File:Button-Copy.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' > '''Copy'''. <br />
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button [[File:Button-Paste.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' > '''Paste'''.<br />
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor. <br />
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.<br />
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|30px|bottom]] or press the <Esc> key when you are done.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Undoing and Redoing actions==<br />
Click the '''Undo''' [[File:undo_button.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button.png]] button in the Face Editor toolbar, or choose '''Undo''' or '''Redo''' from the '''Edit''' menu.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding and managing layers==<br />
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.<br />
<br />
'''Layer Toolbar'''<br />
<br />
Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:<br />
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list. <br />
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.<br />
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.<br />
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.) <br />
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer. <br />
<br />
'''''To add a new layer '''''<br />
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel. <br />
#:[[File:layer_controls_in_face_editor.png]]<br />
#:The Input dialog opens. <br />
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).<br />
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer. <br />
<br />
'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''<br />
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.<br />
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed. <br />
#Paste the object(s).<br />
<br />
'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=<br />
<br />
===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===<br />
#To print a single face, display the face in the Face Editor and choose '''Print To Scale''' from the '''File''' menu. To print all faces of the enclosure, choose the same command in the 3D View window.<br />
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.<br />
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.<br />
#Click '''Print.'''<br />
<br />
===To calibrate the printer===<br />
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.<br />
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button. <br />
#A test page opens.<br />
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle. <br />
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens. <br />
#:[[File:dialog-PrintToScale-Record_Measurements.jpg]]<br />
#If the printed rectangle is not 3" x 3", then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''.<br><br />
<br><br />
<br />
=Exporting and importing face templates=<br />
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer.<br><br />
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].<br />
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.<br />
#Select '''Graphics > Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.<br />
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.<br />
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it. <br />
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.<br />
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics > Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image. <br />
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.<br />
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.<br></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Four_measurement_lines_ANNOTATED.png&diff=3134File:Four measurement lines ANNOTATED.png2016-09-29T16:50:42Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Midpoints_snap_points_exampleRESIZED.png&diff=3121File:Midpoints snap points exampleRESIZED.png2016-09-29T15:41:59Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Center_snap_points_exampleRESIZED.png&diff=3120File:Center snap points exampleRESIZED.png2016-09-29T15:41:45Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Origin_snap_points_exampleRESIZED.png&diff=3119File:Origin snap points exampleRESIZED.png2016-09-29T15:41:31Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Cutout_snap_points_exampleRESIZED.png&diff=3118File:Cutout snap points exampleRESIZED.png2016-09-29T15:41:15Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Boundary_snap_points_exampleRESIZED.png&diff=3117File:Boundary snap points exampleRESIZED.png2016-09-29T15:37:04Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Boundary_snap_points_example.png&diff=3114File:Boundary snap points example.png2016-09-29T15:00:20Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Center_snap_points_example.png&diff=3113File:Center snap points example.png2016-09-29T14:59:42Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Midpoints_snap_points_example.png&diff=3112File:Midpoints snap points example.png2016-09-29T14:59:20Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Profile_snap_points_example.png&diff=3111File:Profile snap points example.png2016-09-29T14:58:56Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Cutout_snap_points_example.png&diff=3110File:Cutout snap points example.png2016-09-29T14:58:43Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Origin_snap_points_example.png&diff=3109File:Origin snap points example.png2016-09-29T14:58:19Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:3D_properties_panel-annotated.png&diff=3101File:3D properties panel-annotated.png2016-09-27T17:12:57Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:3D_properties_panel.png&diff=3100File:3D properties panel.png2016-09-27T17:05:58Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Subassembly_button_3d-view.png&diff=3097File:Subassembly button 3d-view.png2016-09-27T16:47:22Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Dimension_button_3d-view.png&diff=3096File:Dimension button 3d-view.png2016-09-27T16:46:42Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Measure3d_button_3d-view.png&diff=3095File:Measure3d button 3d-view.png2016-09-27T16:46:22Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Move_button_3d-view.png&diff=3094File:Move button 3d-view.png2016-09-27T16:45:08Z<p>Stownsend: 3D Mode toolbar</p>
<hr />
<div>3D Mode toolbar</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues&diff=3093Knowledgebase - Known Issues2016-09-27T16:23:45Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div>__NOTOC__<br />
The following issues might be encountered in the latest release. <br />
<br />
===Image Load Error for .JPG files===<br />
Some .JPG files do not import with the Java tools used for Protocase Designer. If you receive an error message ("Unable to load image...") when attempting to place a .JPG file on a face, we recommend that you convert the .JPG to a bitmap format, such as .PNG. If for any reason you cannot save the .JPG as a bitmap, one program that works very well for converting images is [http://www.imagemagick.org/script/binary-releases.php '''ImageMagick'''], which is free and runs with Unix, Mac OS X, iOS, and Windows.<br />
<br />
===Offset Grid===<br />
If you enter an '''Offset Width''' and/or '''Height''' to the '''Grid Size''' and then use '''Snap to Grid''', objects do not snap to the correct coordinates. <br />
<br />
===Warning for grained finishes===<br />
When part dimensions are too small for a grained finish, Designer issues a warning that you cannot use grained finish on galvanneal, even when the part is not galvanneal. Ignore the warning, but ensure the minimum dimension for a grained finish is 3” x 5”.<br />
<br />
===Computer enclosure templates===<br />
The computer enclosure templates allow you to specify dimensions that are below the minimum sizes required to accommodate the cutouts or PEM layouts.<br />
<br />
===Copying/pasting text boxes and grouped cutouts===<br />
Copying/pasting a text box does not retain the rotation of the box, and copying/pasting a group of cutouts mirrors the parts.<br />
<br />
===Computer enclosure welding===<br />
In the ATX and Mini-ITX templates, both the '''Has Seam Welds''' and '''Has Tack Welds''' options can be selected. If both are selected, Protocase will perform only the seam welds. <br />
<br />
===5-sided enclosure welding===<br />
Designs using the 5-sided enclosure template do not include plug welding in the quote.<br />
<br />
===Importing graphics templates===<br />
When using the '''Import graphics template''' command, Designer displays silkscreen-related prompts even when the face (or default) is set to Direct Digital printing. <br />
<br />
===Grid offsets===<br />
As of Version 4.5, the '''Offset Width''' and '''Offset Height''' fields in the Grid Size dialog have no effect. The grid origin will remain at 0,0. <br />
<br />
===Loading times===<br />
On standard machines, complex templates (such as a 3-Piece Rackmount, Recessed Consolet, or Tiered Consolet) could take a little extra time to load, as could complex PDAs when first loaded after installing a Designer upgrade. Each release includes incremental improvements to these loading times.<br />
<br />
===Trimming ellipses and circles===<br />
Ellipses and circles will not intersect in the Trim mode with elliptical arcs or other ellipses. For example, if you draw an ellipse and then place a different shape on top of it, such as a rectangle or circle, there is no problem. But if you add an elliptical arc or another ellipse across the existing one, the objects cannot be trimmed or merged. <br />
<br />
===5-sided enclosure with wall mounts===<br />
When you attempt to quote a 5-sided enclosure with wall mounts, Designer opens the Design Errors dialog which states that the wall mounts require a hole in hanging parts required to add the powdercoat, and if you click the "Fix error" button the Edit Assembly dialog opens (erroneously). The warning can safely be ignored, since the wall mounts are welded on so they are not hung separately from the chassis. The defective warning and response will be fixed in an upcoming release.<br />
<br />
===Installation on Mac OSX ===<br />
As of Version 4.5, installation of Designer on Mac OSX requires Java 1.6 to be installed. A newer Java version will be bundled with a Designer Beta version soon to be released, which will not require you to install Java. <br />
<br />
===Mirror Y===<br />
When you click '''Mirror Y''' for an object (including text), the object does not stay in the exact same place, and you can get a Boundary Warning even if it is nowhere near a boundary. Until this is fixed, simply accept the placement, then move it back where you wanted. <br />
<br />
===Vector graphics===<br />
Designer does not support the ''display'' of vector files, but the production of enclosures with graphics at Protocase does require their ''use.'' For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding Images''']].<br />
<br />
===L-shape and rackmount enclosures===<br />
L-shape and rackmount enclosure designs created before January 2013, when loaded into the current Designer version, might have offset cutouts. If you encounter this problem, please email the design file to designer@protocase.com stating the problem, and we will manually convert the file for you at no charge. <br />
<br />
===Loading personal cutouts===<br />
Cutout Library Manager > Create Sub Assembly: When loading an item you have created, it is not yet displayed in the 3D View.<br />
<br />
===Placing a PEM===<br />
When placing a PEM or screw, if you click any tool, the items are placed and shown in the 3D View exactly ''as if'' you had clicked the '''Accept & Close''' button, but those items are not accepted, quoted or saved. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''See Also:'''<br />
* [[Knowledgebase_-_Planned_Enhancements | Planned Enhancements]]<br />
*[[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released | Software Fixes Released]]</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&diff=3092Face Editor2016-09-26T17:09:41Z<p>Stownsend: /* Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly */</p>
<hr />
<div>=Face Editor overview=<br />
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure. <br />
<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels3.png|1000px|Face Editor Window]]<br />
<br />
;2D Menu bar<br />
:Contains File, Edit, Cutout Library and Fasteners, Grid, View, Graphics, and Help menus. <br />
<br />
;2D Standard toolbar<br />
:Contains common commands such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, and Zoom.<br />
<br />
;2D Mode toolbar<br />
:Contains tools to add shapes, text, and images to the face, as well as exclusion and masking zones and construction lines.<br />
<br />
;2D Viewport<br />
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.<br />
<br />
;2D Status bar<br />
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.<br />
<br />
;2D Properties panel<br />
:Displays context-sensitive Help and properties that can be changed for the selected object.<br><br><br />
<br />
===2D Standard Toolbar===<br />
[[File:2D-toolbar.png]]<br><br><br />
From left to right, the buttons are:<br />
{|<br />
| [[File:Button-acceptclose.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Accept'''<br />
| Accept changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Reject button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Reject'''<br />
| Reject changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Cut.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Cut'''<br />
| Cut object(s).<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Copy.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Copy'''<br />
| Copy object(s).<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Paste.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Paste'''<br />
| Paste object(s) that have been cut or copied.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-PartView.png|30px|top]]<br />
| '''Part View'''<br />
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which lists each part, face, and design element: <br />
|-<br />
|<br />
|<br />
| [[File:Window-parttree-ushape-note.png|300px]]<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Zoom_In_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Zoom In'''<br />
|Zoom in on the face. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Zoom Out'''<br />
| Zoom out from the face. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Reset_View_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Reset View'''<br />
| Zoom out from the face. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-togglegrid.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Toggle Grid'''<br />
| Toggle on/off the grid display. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-gridsize.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Grid Size'''<br />
| Change the grid size. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-snapgrid.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Snap to Grid'''<br />
| Toggle on/off snapping to the grid. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Keyslot_undo_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Undo'''<br />
| Undo your last action. .<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Redo_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Redo'''<br />
| Repeat your last action. .<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-ViewBack.png|bottom]]<br />
| '''Back'''<br />
| Display the back of the face. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-ViewFront.png|bottom]]<br />
| '''Front'''<br />
| Display the front of the face.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Draw.png|bottom]]<br />
| '''Draw'''<br />
| When dragging the mouse, act on objects (draw, move, etc.). <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Pan.png|bottom]]<br />
| '''Pan'''<br />
| When dragging the mouse, do not act on objects but just pan the face. <br />
|}<br><br><br />
<br />
===Face Editor preferences===<br />
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].<br><br><br />
<br />
=Viewing the face=<br />
<br />
==Panning==<br />
To pan the model or face, do one of the following:<br />
*In the 3D View:<br />
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the model.<br />
::''or''<br />
:*Hold down the <Alt> key, then drag the model.<br><br><br />
*In the Face Editor:<br />
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the face.<br />
::''or''<br />
:*Click and hold down the mouse wheel-button while dragging the face.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Zooming==<br />
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.<br />
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.<br />
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following. <br />
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Zoom_In_button.png|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.<br />
:*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' > '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom.<br><br />
*To zoom in on a particular area:<br />
*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Resetting the view==<br />
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:<br />
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset_View_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.<br />
*Choose '''View''' > '''Reset Zoom'''.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Viewing the front or back of the face==<br />
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, choose '''View''' > '''Toggle Side Showing'''. <br><br />
[[File:Toggle-Side-Showing-command.png|175px]]<br><br />
Or, you can use the 2D Standard toolbar buttons to display either side:<br />
*To display the back of the face, click the '''Inside''' [[File:button-inside.png]] or '''Back''' [[File:Button-ViewBack.png]] button. <br />
*To display the front of the face, click the '''Outside''' [[File:Button-Outside.png]] or '''Front''' [[File:Button-ViewFront.png]] button. <br />
(If an enclosure is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Inside''' and '''Outside'''. If a panel is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Back''' and '''Front'''.) Whichever button you click becomes shaded to indicate that it is in effect.<br />
<br />
=Coordinate System=<br />
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.<br />
<br />
[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]]<br><br><br />
<br />
===Choosing the Units of Measure===<br />
<br />
You can set the default unit of measure. <br />
<br />
#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.<br />
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.<br />
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM). <br />
#Click '''OK.'''<br><br><br><br />
<br />
=Drawing shapes=<br />
<br />
==Selecting the drawing (object) type==<br />
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''.<br><br />
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the "Mode" label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''.<br><br />
#:[[File:button-mode.png||60px|bottom]]<br><br />
#:The Draw Type window opens:<br><br />
#:[[File:Mode_menu.png]]<br><br />
#Click the button that you want to use as the default. The button label changes to indicate the current object type.<br><br><br />
<br />
===Using the Cutout object type===<br />
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera.<br><br />
'''See Also:'''<br />
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]<br><br><br />
<br />
===Using the Graphic object type===<br />
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.<br />
<br />
====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====<br />
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.<br />
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press <Enter>. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.). <br />
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:<br />
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is "None"; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.<br />
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads. <br />
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish. <br />
:*The printed area must be no more than 46"x46", and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24" high.<br />
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface. <br />
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed.<br><br />
<br />
=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====<br />
#Choose '''Edit''' > '''Preferences'''.<br />
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:<br />
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)<br />
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)<br />
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to "Graphic" for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.) <br />
#Click '''OK'''.<br><br />
<br />
=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====<br />
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change. <br />
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu. <br />
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face.<br><br />
'''See Also:''' <br />
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]<br />
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]]<br><br><br />
<br />
===Using the Exclusion object type===<br />
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.<br />
<br />
===Using the Masking object type===<br />
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust.<br><br />
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.<br />
#:[[File:Select_Draw_Type_masking.png|400px]]<br />
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked.<br><br />
'''Notes'''<br><br />
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.<br />
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1".<br><br><br />
<br />
===Using the Construct object type===<br />
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing circles==<br />
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.<br />
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.<br />
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|30px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing ellipses==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.<br />
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.<br />
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|30px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing rectangles and squares==<br />
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.<br />
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.<br />
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|30px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing custom paths==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path.png|30px]].<br />
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.<br />
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Creating an arc using the Path tool====<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.<br />
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment). <br />
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press <a>.<br />
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.<br />
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer. <br />
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size. <br />
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing <A>). <br />
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.)<br><br><br />
<br />
====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====<br />
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.<br />
<br />
'''''To merge two or more objects'''''<br />
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object. <br />
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE1.jpg]]<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.) <br />
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE2.jpg]]<br />
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu. <br />
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE3.jpg]]<br />
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout. <br />
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE4.jpg]]<br><br><br />
'''''To edit a merged object'''''<br><br />
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right. <br />
:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE5.jpg]] [[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE6.jpg]]<br><br><br />
'''Note''' If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. <br><br><br />
'''''To trim two or more objects'''''<br><br />
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.<br />
#Place a circle on the face.<br />
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it. <br />
#:[[File:example-Trim1.jpg]]<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.<br />
#:[[File:example-Trim2.jpg]]<br />
#Click the '''Trim''' button.<br />
#:The outline of each object is outlined, the cursor icon turns into an eraser (not shown in these examples).<br />
#:[[File:example-Trim3.jpg]]<br />
#Use the eraser to eliminate the lines you do not want.<br />
#:[[File:example-Trim4.jpg]]<br />
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode. <span style="color:#ff0000">'''Important!'''</span> If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved.<br> <br />
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such. <br />
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]<br />
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:<br />
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1.jpg]]<br><br />
'''See Also: '''<br />
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]<br />
<br />
<br />
====Solving problems with merging objects====<br />
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.<br />
<br><br><br />
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom:<br><br />
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1.jpg]]<br><br />
If you then merge them and click <Esc>, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view. <br />
<br><br><br />
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic. <br />
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle. <br />
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2.jpg]]<br />
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well. <br />
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:<br />
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3.jpg|300px]]<br />
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4.jpg|300px]]<br />
#When completed, click the <Esc> key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing lines==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.<br />
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.<br />
#Drag to set the end of the line.<br />
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing arcs==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.<br />
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc. <br />
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc. <br />
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc. <br />
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding text==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.<br />
#Click on the face and begin typing.<br />
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''<Enter>''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time. <br />
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. <br />
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''', and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Adding special characters====<br />
You can add any special character such as the registered trademark symbol to text, as follows. (The <Alt> character code method is not supported.) <br />
#Copy the character from any site such as [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script Wikipedia] or from the Character Map application in Windows. <br />
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:<br />
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example.png|border|500px]]<br />
#:'''Tip''' The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:<br />
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example2.png|border|500px]]<br><br><br />
<br />
'''See Also'''<br><br />
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]'''<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding images==<br />
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF). Vector files (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed. '''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/ '''Spotting the Difference'''].<br><br />
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].<br />
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:image_button.png|50px]] on the Mode toolbar.<br />
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed. <br />
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.) <br />
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:<br />
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).<br />
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received. <br />
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves. <br />
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.<br />
'''Notes''': <br><br />
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer. <br />
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins. <br><br><br />
====Exporting images====<br />
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.<br />
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export. <br />
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens. <br />
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. <br><br><br />
<br />
=Using the Measure tool=<br />
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one.<br> <br />
'''See Also:'''<br />
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]<br />
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure.png|40px|bottom]]<br />
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). <br />
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.<br />
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1.png|600px]]<br><br><br />
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br />
<br />
==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==<br />
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure.png|40px|bottom]]<br />
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.<br />
#Click the centre of the circle cutout. <br />
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.<br />
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure1.png|500px]]<br />
#Enter "5" in '''x difference''' and "-3" in '''y difference'''.<br />
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)<br />
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure-moved1.png|500px]]<br><br />
<br />
==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==<br />
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object. <br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure.png|40px|bottom]]<br />
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). <br />
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points. <br />
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1.png|500 px]]<br />
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of "1" and an '''x difference''' of "1".<br />
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel.<br><br />
<br />
==Displaying measurements==<br />
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes.<br><br><br />
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points'''''<br><br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:button-Dimension-ModePanel-FaceEditor.jpg|40px|bottom]]<br />
#:The distance of "0.000" is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint. <br />
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor. <br />
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed. <br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-1.jpg|border]]<br />
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.<br />
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green. <br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-2.jpg|border]]<br />
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:<br />
#::The distance between the two points;<br />
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and<br />
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).<br />
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure. <br />
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed. The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle. <br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-3.jpg|border]]<br />
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse. <br />
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way. <br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-4.jpg|border]]<br />
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:<br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-5.jpg|border]]<br />
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:<br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-6.jpg|border]]<br><br><br />
<br />
'''''To delete a displayed measurement'''''<br><br />
Do either of the following:<br />
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu. <br />
*Highlight the line and press the <Delete> key.<br><br><br />
'''''See Also''''' <br />
*[[Face Editor#Measuring distances|Using the Measure tool]]<br><br><br />
<br />
=Using the grid=<br />
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects.<br><br><br />
<br />
Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel. <br />
<br />
===Turn on/off the Grid===<br />
#Do one of the following:<br />
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid.png|bottom]]<br />
#*On the Grid menu, select '''Toggle Grid'''.<br />
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.<br />
{{Note|The '''Snap to Grid''' option is automatically enabled when the grid is turned on.}}<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid.png|600px|thumb|left|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]<br />
<br clear=all><br />
<br />
===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===<br />
'''Note: Snap to Grid''' is automatically enabled when the grid is turned on.<br><br />
#Do one of the following:<br />
#*On the Standard toolbar, click '''Snap to Grid''' [[File:button-snapgrid.png|bottom]]<br />
#*On the Grid menu, click '''Snap to Grid'''.<br />
#Repeat to toggle the state of '''Snap to Grid'''.<br><br><br />
<br />
===Changing grid size and offset===<br />
#On the Standard toolbar, click [[File:button-gridsize.png|bottom]] or choose '''Grid Size''' from the '''Grid''' menu.<br />
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:<br />
:[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize.png|left]]<br />
<br clear=all> <br />
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.<br />
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.<br />
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.<br />
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.<br />
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.<br />
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.<br />
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset.png|500px|thumb|left|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]<br />
<br clear=all><br />
<br />
=Managing object properties=<br />
<br />
[[File:top_of_properties_panel.jpg|thumb|Top of Properties panel]]<br />
<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkcreened circle]]<br />
<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkscreened text]]<br />
<br />
===Top of Properties Panel===<br />
* Click the line that reads "Click to Expand Context Help" to read usage tips for the current object you are editing (circle, ellipse, text, etcetera). Click anywhere in the upper panel again to hide the help. <br />
* For help on the Layers buttons and its toolbar, please see [[Face Editor#Adding and managing layers|Adding and managing layers]].<br />
* The checkbox "On This Side" is selected when the object is on the side that you are editing. Clear the check box to move the object to the other side of the face. <br />
<br />
*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.<br />
<br />
===Fill===<br />
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.<br />
<br />
===Line Thickness===<br />
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.<br />
<br />
===Color===<br />
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu. <br />
<br />
===Type===<br />
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.<br />
* Object types include:<br />
:Cutout<br />
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)<br />
:Exclusion<br />
:Construct<br />
<br />
===Origin===<br />
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.<br />
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.<br />
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.<br />
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:<br />
:'''Circles''' -- centre<br />
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre<br />
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin<br />
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner<br />
:'''Paths''' -- start point<br />
:'''Lines''' -- start point<br />
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner<br><br />
'''See Also'''<br><br />
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]<br />
<br />
===Circles===<br />
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.<br />
===Ellipses===<br />
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).<br />
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).<br />
===Rectangles===<br />
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.<br />
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise<br />
===Lines===<br />
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.<br />
===Images===<br />
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.<br />
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise<br />
===Text===<br />
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise<br />
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].<br />
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.<br />
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.<br />
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.<br />
<br />
===Path===<br />
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding notes==<br />
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering & Design Services team. For example:<br />
* "Round the corners of this rectangle to a radius of .05 inches." <br />
* "Put a hinged door over this cutout." <br />
* "Put rubber feet on this face.”<br />
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering & Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering & Design Services will give you the correct quote.<br><br><br />
'''''To add a note to an object'''''<br />
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note. <br />
#Type the note in the blank text window in the Properties panel. When done, click either arrow above the text box, or any other tool in the Properties panel. <br />
#;[[File:notes_tools_in_face_editor.jpg]]<br />
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.<br />
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time.<br><br><br />
'''''To add a general note'''''<br />
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' [[File:3D_View_-_Part_Tree_button.png|40px]] button.<br />
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.<br />
#Type the note in the bottom text window. In the following example, a note was added to the assembly. <br />
#;[[File:Assembly_Tree_example.png|400px]]<br />
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it.<br><br><br />
'''''To delete a note'''''<br />
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button.<br><br><br />
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''<br />
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View > View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance. <br />
#:[[File:view_notes_window.jpg|500 px]]<br />
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Adding cutouts=<br />
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure.<br><br />
'''See Also:'''<br><br />
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]<br />
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]]<br><br><br />
<br />
===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===<br />
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library. <br />
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''.<br />
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description. <br />
#;[[File:library_manager.jpg|600px]]<br />
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout. <br />
#;[[File:Cursor_changes_when_click_place_item_button.jpg|300px]]<br />
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.<br />
#;[[File:Cursor_stays_to_place_item_multiple_times.jpg|300px]]<br />
#When you are done, press <Esc> or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.<br><br><br />
<br />
===Adding a cutout by selecting it from the Cutout Library and Fasteners menu===<br />
Use this method when you know exactly which cutout you want to load.<br />
#In the Face Editor, drill down through the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''main library''' or '''personal library''' listings, and click on the name of the cutout that you want to load. <br />
#;[[File:Adding cutouts menu.jpg|600px]]<br><br />
#The cursor changes to an image of the cutout; click each location on the face where you want to place the cutout. <br />
#When you are done, press <Esc> or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding "D" port cutouts==<br />
You can add a "D"-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.<br />
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel. <br />
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it. <br />
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding cutouts that cross the edge of a face==<br />
You can configure Designer to allow you to choose to cut the edge of the face when placing an object across a face boundary. <br />
#In [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''']], set '''Error Response''' to ''ASK.'' This will cause Designer to prompt you to choose whether to accept or reject the placement when you draw or move a cutout so that it lies across the boundary.<br />
#Also in Preferences, clear the '''Cut Face''' check box. (If you select the check box, Designer will not give you a choice, but will automatically cut the boundary.)<br />
#;[[File:Cut-face preferences.png]]<br />
#Click '''OK''' to save the Preferences settings. <br />
#:From now on, when you draw or move an object across a boundary, you receive the prompt, as shown below when a rectangle is being created across the panel's top.<br><br />
#:[[File:cut_face_prompt.png]]<br><br />
#:If you choose '''Accept and Cut Face''', the face is cut accordingly:<br><br />
#:[[File:After-cutting-face.png]]<br><br><br />
<br />
=Adding hardware=<br />
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles. <br />
<br />
==Adding self-clinching fasteners==<br />
Protocase uses PEM<sup><small>®</small></sup> brand self-clinching fasteners.<br />
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.<br />
#:The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens. <br />
#:[[File:self-clinching_fastener_selection_dialog.jpg|300px]]<br />
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.<br />
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)<br />
#Select the thread '''Length'''. <br />
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed. <br />
#Select a '''Part Number'''. <br />
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature.<br><br />
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with "ZI".) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones. <br />
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.<br />
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Edit''' button [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press the '''Esc''' key.<br />
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-pem.png|400px|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]<br><br><br />
#:[[File:window-main-pem.png|400px|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]<br><br />
'''See Also''':<br><br />
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding hardware such as handles==<br />
#On the Standard toolbar, click '''Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show and snap to the grid.<br />
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library''', point to '''Hardware''', then select a hardware item.<br />
#When you are done adding hardware, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]].<br />
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles.png|600px|Placing handles]]<br />
#:[[File:window-main-ushape-handles.png|600px|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]<br />
<br />
==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==<br />
====Adding a countersink to a face====<br />
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole. <br />
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel. <br />
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.<br />
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-countersink.png|border]]<br />
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.<br />
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of "100.0° #2" indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)<br />
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.<br />
#;[[File:message-incorrect-cutout-size.png]]<br />
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.<br />
#:[[File:countersink.png]]<br><br><br />
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.<br><br />
<br />
'''''Adding multiple countersinks to a face'''''<br />
*To add multiple countersinks to a face at one time, draw a circle for each hole, click the '''Edit''' button, select all circles, and then click the '''Countersink''' check box.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Adding a tapped hole to a face====<br />
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.<br />
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole. <br />
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box. <br />
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.<br />
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-tapped_hole.png|border]]<br />
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.<br />
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of "2-56 [0.07]" indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07" for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.<br />
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.) <br />
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face.<br><br />
#:[[File:Tapped_hole_in_face_editor.png]]<br><br />
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.<br />
<br><br />
<br />
'''''Adding multiple tapped holes to a face'''''<br />
*To add multiple tapped holes to a face at one time, draw a circle for each hole, click the '''Edit''' button, select all circles, and then click the '''Tapped Hole''' check box.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Adding screws to a face====<br />
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''. <br />
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.<br />
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Replacing screws and PEMs====<br />
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)<br />
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the screw. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it. <br />
#In the Properties panel, notice the new '''Replace...''' button, which includes the part name of the screw. (Only part of the part name is visible on the button; to read the entire name, hover over the button.)<br />
#;[[file:SCREW_INFO.jpg|400px]]<br />
#To replace the screw with a PEM (or a PEM with another PEM), click the button. The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the '''Thread Type''' and '''Part Number''', and then click the '''Place PEM''' button. <br />
''Alternate method'': Right-click a screw and choose '''Properties''' to review and/or replace the screw with a PEM. The Properties window also lets you edit the '''Origin(X)''', '''Origin(Y)''', '''Rotation''', and the side of the face that the screw sticks up out of.<br />
<br />
==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==<br />
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it, then add it to an enclosure.<br><br><br />
'''''To create and save a customized bracket'''''<br />
#Click '''New'''.<br />
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens. <br />
#:[[File:dialog-Brackets_NewAssemblyFromTemplate.jpg|400 px]]<br />
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary. <br />
#:[[File:New4.4.9-Dialog-Brackets-NewAssemblySPECS.jpg|400 px]]<br />
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button. <br />
#:The 3D View window opens.<br />
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the '''Cutout Library Manager''' menu.<br />
#You are prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure); click '''OK''' and then do so. <br />
#:The New Library Item dialog opens. <br />
#:[[File:New_library_item_dialog.jpg|200 px]]<br />
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:<br />
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the assembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is "L Bracket by Base - Bottom". ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''<br />
#:'''Part Number''' <br />
#:'''Description''' <br />
#Click '''OK.'''<br />
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.<br><br />
#:'''Note On Bracket Origin and Placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the bracket template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing the bracket on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face.<br><br />
<br />
'''''To place a bracket on the enclosure'''''<br />
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.<br />
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a bracket to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the bracket later, do save the bracket as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.) <br />
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' is selected for the bracket placement.<br />
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the bracket that you want to add to the enclosure. (The customized brackets that you saved to the library are listed in the '''personal library''' section.)<br />
#Click the '''Place Item''' button. <br />
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon. <br />
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the bracket will be placed where you click. You can add multiple brackets in this way.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Manipulating objects=<br />
==Selecting object(s)==<br />
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]<br />
#Do one of the following:<br />
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.<br />
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.<br />
#*To select multiple objects:<br />
#**Click the first object, then down the <Shift> key and click the other objects; or<br />
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects. <br />
#::[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection.png|500px]]<br />
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.<br />
#:[[File:selected_objects.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
==Editing object(s)==<br />
'''''To edit a single object'''''<br><br />
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''. <br />
''or''<br />
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type. <br />
<br><br />
'''''To edit a group'''''<br><br />
You can edit the group as a whole, or you can edit each individual object in the group. To edit the group as a whole, follow the instructions above for a single object. To edit individual objects in a group:<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button in the Properties panel.<br />
#;[[file:editing_a_group1.jpg|border]]<br />
#The group of objects is displayed in the Cutout Editor. This screen is like the Face Editor, but only the group of objects is displayed. You can now edit any of the individual objects in the group.<br />
#;[[file:editing_a_group2.jpg|600px]]<br />
#When you are finished editing the objects in the group, click '''Accept and Close''' [[File:button-acceptclose.png|20px|bottom]] in the Face Editor toolbar. The Cutout Editor closes, and the group is displayed as usual in the Face Editor.<br><br />
'''See Also'''<br />
*To ungroup the items, edit them individually, then regroup the items without leaving the Face Editor, see [[Face_Editor#Group_and_ungroup_objects|Grouping and ungrouping objects]].<br><br><br />
<br />
==Moving object(s)==<br />
To move a single object:<br><br />
#Select the object.<br />
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.<br><br><br />
<br />
To move several objects:<br><br />
#Select all the objects.<br />
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.<br><br><br />
<br />
To move cutouts from one face to another:<br />
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items. <br />
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with. <br />
:For detailed instructions, see:<br />
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]<br />
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Grouping and ungrouping objects==<br />
'''''To group objects'''''<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.<br />
#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the <Shift> key and select each object. <br />
#Click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. <br><br />
'''''To ungroup objects'''''<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.<br />
#Click the group.<br />
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel.<br><br />
'''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement.<br><br><br />
'''See Also'''<br />
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]<br />
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Aligning and distributing objects==<br />
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.<br />
<br />
#Select 2 or more objects.<br />
#In the Properties panel, click an Alignment or Distribute command.<br><br />
'''Alignment'''<br><br />
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects<br><br />
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects<br><br />
<br><br />
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects<br><br />
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects<br><br />
<br><br />
'''''Notes:'''''<br />
*Objects align to the first object selected.<br />
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align.png|600px|thumb|left|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]<br><br />
<br clear=all> <br />
<br />
'''Distribute'''<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects<br><br />
<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects<br><br><br />
<br />
==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select one or more objects.<br />
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button [[File:Button-Cut.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' > '''Cut'''. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button [[File:Button-Copy.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' > '''Copy'''. <br />
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button [[File:Button-Paste.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' > '''Paste'''.<br />
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor. <br />
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.<br />
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|30px|bottom]] or press the <Esc> key when you are done.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Undoing and Redoing actions==<br />
Click the '''Undo''' [[File:undo_button.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button.png]] button in the Face Editor toolbar, or choose '''Undo''' or '''Redo''' from the '''Edit''' menu.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding and managing layers==<br />
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.<br />
<br />
'''Layer Toolbar'''<br />
<br />
Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:<br />
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list. <br />
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.<br />
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.<br />
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.) <br />
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer. <br />
<br />
'''''To add a new layer '''''<br />
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel. <br />
#:[[File:layer_controls_in_face_editor.png]]<br />
#:The Input dialog opens. <br />
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).<br />
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer. <br />
<br />
'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''<br />
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.<br />
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed. <br />
#Paste the object(s).<br />
<br />
'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=<br />
<br />
===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===<br />
#To print a single face, display the face in the Face Editor and choose '''Print To Scale''' from the '''File''' menu. To print all faces of the enclosure, choose the same command in the 3D View window.<br />
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.<br />
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.<br />
#Click '''Print.'''<br />
<br />
===To calibrate the printer===<br />
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.<br />
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button. <br />
#A test page opens.<br />
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle. <br />
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens. <br />
#:[[File:dialog-PrintToScale-Record_Measurements.jpg]]<br />
#If the printed rectangle is not 3" x 3", then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''.<br><br />
<br><br />
<br />
=Exporting and importing face templates=<br />
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer.<br><br />
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].<br />
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.<br />
#Select '''Graphics > Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.<br />
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.<br />
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it. <br />
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.<br />
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics > Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image. <br />
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.<br />
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.<br></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&diff=3091Face Editor2016-09-26T17:01:41Z<p>Stownsend: /* Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly */</p>
<hr />
<div>=Face Editor overview=<br />
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure. <br />
<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels3.png|1000px|Face Editor Window]]<br />
<br />
;2D Menu bar<br />
:Contains File, Edit, Cutout Library and Fasteners, Grid, View, Graphics, and Help menus. <br />
<br />
;2D Standard toolbar<br />
:Contains common commands such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, and Zoom.<br />
<br />
;2D Mode toolbar<br />
:Contains tools to add shapes, text, and images to the face, as well as exclusion and masking zones and construction lines.<br />
<br />
;2D Viewport<br />
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.<br />
<br />
;2D Status bar<br />
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.<br />
<br />
;2D Properties panel<br />
:Displays context-sensitive Help and properties that can be changed for the selected object.<br><br><br />
<br />
===2D Standard Toolbar===<br />
[[File:2D-toolbar.png]]<br><br><br />
From left to right, the buttons are:<br />
{|<br />
| [[File:Button-acceptclose.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Accept'''<br />
| Accept changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Reject button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Reject'''<br />
| Reject changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Cut.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Cut'''<br />
| Cut object(s).<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Copy.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Copy'''<br />
| Copy object(s).<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Paste.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Paste'''<br />
| Paste object(s) that have been cut or copied.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-PartView.png|30px|top]]<br />
| '''Part View'''<br />
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which lists each part, face, and design element: <br />
|-<br />
|<br />
|<br />
| [[File:Window-parttree-ushape-note.png|300px]]<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Zoom_In_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Zoom In'''<br />
|Zoom in on the face. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Zoom Out'''<br />
| Zoom out from the face. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Reset_View_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Reset View'''<br />
| Zoom out from the face. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-togglegrid.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Toggle Grid'''<br />
| Toggle on/off the grid display. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-gridsize.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Grid Size'''<br />
| Change the grid size. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-snapgrid.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Snap to Grid'''<br />
| Toggle on/off snapping to the grid. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Keyslot_undo_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Undo'''<br />
| Undo your last action. .<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Redo_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Redo'''<br />
| Repeat your last action. .<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-ViewBack.png|bottom]]<br />
| '''Back'''<br />
| Display the back of the face. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-ViewFront.png|bottom]]<br />
| '''Front'''<br />
| Display the front of the face.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Draw.png|bottom]]<br />
| '''Draw'''<br />
| When dragging the mouse, act on objects (draw, move, etc.). <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Pan.png|bottom]]<br />
| '''Pan'''<br />
| When dragging the mouse, do not act on objects but just pan the face. <br />
|}<br><br><br />
<br />
===Face Editor preferences===<br />
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].<br><br><br />
<br />
=Viewing the face=<br />
<br />
==Panning==<br />
To pan the model or face, do one of the following:<br />
*In the 3D View:<br />
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the model.<br />
::''or''<br />
:*Hold down the <Alt> key, then drag the model.<br><br><br />
*In the Face Editor:<br />
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the face.<br />
::''or''<br />
:*Click and hold down the mouse wheel-button while dragging the face.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Zooming==<br />
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.<br />
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.<br />
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following. <br />
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Zoom_In_button.png|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.<br />
:*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' > '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom.<br><br />
*To zoom in on a particular area:<br />
*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Resetting the view==<br />
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:<br />
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset_View_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.<br />
*Choose '''View''' > '''Reset Zoom'''.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Viewing the front or back of the face==<br />
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, choose '''View''' > '''Toggle Side Showing'''. <br><br />
[[File:Toggle-Side-Showing-command.png|175px]]<br><br />
Or, you can use the 2D Standard toolbar buttons to display either side:<br />
*To display the back of the face, click the '''Inside''' [[File:button-inside.png]] or '''Back''' [[File:Button-ViewBack.png]] button. <br />
*To display the front of the face, click the '''Outside''' [[File:Button-Outside.png]] or '''Front''' [[File:Button-ViewFront.png]] button. <br />
(If an enclosure is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Inside''' and '''Outside'''. If a panel is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Back''' and '''Front'''.) Whichever button you click becomes shaded to indicate that it is in effect.<br />
<br />
=Coordinate System=<br />
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.<br />
<br />
[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]]<br><br><br />
<br />
===Choosing the Units of Measure===<br />
<br />
You can set the default unit of measure. <br />
<br />
#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.<br />
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.<br />
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM). <br />
#Click '''OK.'''<br><br><br><br />
<br />
=Drawing shapes=<br />
<br />
==Selecting the drawing (object) type==<br />
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''.<br><br />
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the "Mode" label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''.<br><br />
#:[[File:button-mode.png||60px|bottom]]<br><br />
#:The Draw Type window opens:<br><br />
#:[[File:Mode_menu.png]]<br><br />
#Click the button that you want to use as the default. The button label changes to indicate the current object type.<br><br><br />
<br />
===Using the Cutout object type===<br />
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera.<br><br />
'''See Also:'''<br />
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]<br><br><br />
<br />
===Using the Graphic object type===<br />
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.<br />
<br />
====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====<br />
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.<br />
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press <Enter>. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.). <br />
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:<br />
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is "None"; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.<br />
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads. <br />
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish. <br />
:*The printed area must be no more than 46"x46", and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24" high.<br />
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface. <br />
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed.<br><br />
<br />
=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====<br />
#Choose '''Edit''' > '''Preferences'''.<br />
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:<br />
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)<br />
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)<br />
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to "Graphic" for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.) <br />
#Click '''OK'''.<br><br />
<br />
=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====<br />
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change. <br />
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu. <br />
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face.<br><br />
'''See Also:''' <br />
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]<br />
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]]<br><br><br />
<br />
===Using the Exclusion object type===<br />
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.<br />
<br />
===Using the Masking object type===<br />
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust.<br><br />
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.<br />
#:[[File:Select_Draw_Type_masking.png|400px]]<br />
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked.<br><br />
'''Notes'''<br><br />
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.<br />
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1".<br><br><br />
<br />
===Using the Construct object type===<br />
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing circles==<br />
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.<br />
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.<br />
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|30px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing ellipses==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.<br />
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.<br />
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|30px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing rectangles and squares==<br />
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.<br />
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.<br />
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|30px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing custom paths==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path.png|30px]].<br />
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.<br />
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Creating an arc using the Path tool====<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.<br />
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment). <br />
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press <a>.<br />
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.<br />
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer. <br />
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size. <br />
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing <A>). <br />
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.)<br><br><br />
<br />
====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====<br />
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.<br />
<br />
'''''To merge two or more objects'''''<br />
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object. <br />
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE1.jpg]]<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.) <br />
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE2.jpg]]<br />
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu. <br />
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE3.jpg]]<br />
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout. <br />
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE4.jpg]]<br><br><br />
'''''To edit a merged object'''''<br><br />
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right. <br />
:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE5.jpg]] [[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE6.jpg]]<br><br><br />
'''Note''' If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. <br><br><br />
'''''To trim two or more objects'''''<br><br />
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.<br />
#Place a circle on the face.<br />
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it. <br />
#:[[File:example-Trim1.jpg]]<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.<br />
#:[[File:example-Trim2.jpg]]<br />
#Click the '''Trim''' button.<br />
#:The outline of each object is outlined, the cursor icon turns into an eraser (not shown in these examples).<br />
#:[[File:example-Trim3.jpg]]<br />
#Use the eraser to eliminate the lines you do not want.<br />
#:[[File:example-Trim4.jpg]]<br />
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode. <span style="color:#ff0000">'''Important!'''</span> If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved.<br> <br />
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such. <br />
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]<br />
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:<br />
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1.jpg]]<br><br />
'''See Also: '''<br />
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]<br />
<br />
<br />
====Solving problems with merging objects====<br />
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.<br />
<br><br><br />
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom:<br><br />
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1.jpg]]<br><br />
If you then merge them and click <Esc>, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view. <br />
<br><br><br />
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic. <br />
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle. <br />
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2.jpg]]<br />
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well. <br />
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:<br />
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3.jpg|300px]]<br />
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4.jpg|300px]]<br />
#When completed, click the <Esc> key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing lines==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.<br />
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.<br />
#Drag to set the end of the line.<br />
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing arcs==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.<br />
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc. <br />
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc. <br />
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc. <br />
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding text==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.<br />
#Click on the face and begin typing.<br />
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''<Enter>''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time. <br />
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. <br />
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''', and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Adding special characters====<br />
You can add any special character such as the registered trademark symbol to text, as follows. (The <Alt> character code method is not supported.) <br />
#Copy the character from any site such as [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script Wikipedia] or from the Character Map application in Windows. <br />
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:<br />
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example.png|border|500px]]<br />
#:'''Tip''' The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:<br />
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example2.png|border|500px]]<br><br><br />
<br />
'''See Also'''<br><br />
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]'''<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding images==<br />
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF). Vector files (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed. '''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/ '''Spotting the Difference'''].<br><br />
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].<br />
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:image_button.png|50px]] on the Mode toolbar.<br />
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed. <br />
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.) <br />
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:<br />
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).<br />
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received. <br />
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves. <br />
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.<br />
'''Notes''': <br><br />
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer. <br />
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins. <br><br><br />
====Exporting images====<br />
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.<br />
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export. <br />
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens. <br />
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. <br><br><br />
<br />
=Using the Measure tool=<br />
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one.<br> <br />
'''See Also:'''<br />
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]<br />
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure.png|40px|bottom]]<br />
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). <br />
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.<br />
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1.png|600px]]<br><br><br />
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br />
<br />
==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==<br />
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure.png|40px|bottom]]<br />
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.<br />
#Click the centre of the circle cutout. <br />
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.<br />
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure1.png|500px]]<br />
#Enter "5" in '''x difference''' and "-3" in '''y difference'''.<br />
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)<br />
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure-moved1.png|500px]]<br><br />
<br />
==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==<br />
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object. <br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure.png|40px|bottom]]<br />
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). <br />
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points. <br />
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1.png|500 px]]<br />
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of "1" and an '''x difference''' of "1".<br />
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel.<br><br />
<br />
==Displaying measurements==<br />
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes.<br><br><br />
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points'''''<br><br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:button-Dimension-ModePanel-FaceEditor.jpg|40px|bottom]]<br />
#:The distance of "0.000" is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint. <br />
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor. <br />
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed. <br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-1.jpg|border]]<br />
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.<br />
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green. <br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-2.jpg|border]]<br />
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:<br />
#::The distance between the two points;<br />
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and<br />
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).<br />
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure. <br />
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed. The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle. <br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-3.jpg|border]]<br />
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse. <br />
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way. <br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-4.jpg|border]]<br />
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:<br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-5.jpg|border]]<br />
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:<br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-6.jpg|border]]<br><br><br />
<br />
'''''To delete a displayed measurement'''''<br><br />
Do either of the following:<br />
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu. <br />
*Highlight the line and press the <Delete> key.<br><br><br />
'''''See Also''''' <br />
*[[Face Editor#Measuring distances|Using the Measure tool]]<br><br><br />
<br />
=Using the grid=<br />
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects.<br><br><br />
<br />
Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel. <br />
<br />
===Turn on/off the Grid===<br />
#Do one of the following:<br />
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid.png|bottom]]<br />
#*On the Grid menu, select '''Toggle Grid'''.<br />
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.<br />
{{Note|The '''Snap to Grid''' option is automatically enabled when the grid is turned on.}}<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid.png|600px|thumb|left|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]<br />
<br clear=all><br />
<br />
===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===<br />
'''Note: Snap to Grid''' is automatically enabled when the grid is turned on.<br><br />
#Do one of the following:<br />
#*On the Standard toolbar, click '''Snap to Grid''' [[File:button-snapgrid.png|bottom]]<br />
#*On the Grid menu, click '''Snap to Grid'''.<br />
#Repeat to toggle the state of '''Snap to Grid'''.<br><br><br />
<br />
===Changing grid size and offset===<br />
#On the Standard toolbar, click [[File:button-gridsize.png|bottom]] or choose '''Grid Size''' from the '''Grid''' menu.<br />
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:<br />
:[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize.png|left]]<br />
<br clear=all> <br />
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.<br />
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.<br />
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.<br />
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.<br />
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.<br />
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.<br />
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset.png|500px|thumb|left|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]<br />
<br clear=all><br />
<br />
=Managing object properties=<br />
<br />
[[File:top_of_properties_panel.jpg|thumb|Top of Properties panel]]<br />
<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkcreened circle]]<br />
<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkscreened text]]<br />
<br />
===Top of Properties Panel===<br />
* Click the line that reads "Click to Expand Context Help" to read usage tips for the current object you are editing (circle, ellipse, text, etcetera). Click anywhere in the upper panel again to hide the help. <br />
* For help on the Layers buttons and its toolbar, please see [[Face Editor#Adding and managing layers|Adding and managing layers]].<br />
* The checkbox "On This Side" is selected when the object is on the side that you are editing. Clear the check box to move the object to the other side of the face. <br />
<br />
*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.<br />
<br />
===Fill===<br />
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.<br />
<br />
===Line Thickness===<br />
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.<br />
<br />
===Color===<br />
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu. <br />
<br />
===Type===<br />
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.<br />
* Object types include:<br />
:Cutout<br />
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)<br />
:Exclusion<br />
:Construct<br />
<br />
===Origin===<br />
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.<br />
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.<br />
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.<br />
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:<br />
:'''Circles''' -- centre<br />
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre<br />
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin<br />
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner<br />
:'''Paths''' -- start point<br />
:'''Lines''' -- start point<br />
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner<br><br />
'''See Also'''<br><br />
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]<br />
<br />
===Circles===<br />
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.<br />
===Ellipses===<br />
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).<br />
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).<br />
===Rectangles===<br />
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.<br />
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise<br />
===Lines===<br />
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.<br />
===Images===<br />
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.<br />
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise<br />
===Text===<br />
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise<br />
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].<br />
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.<br />
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.<br />
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.<br />
<br />
===Path===<br />
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding notes==<br />
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering & Design Services team. For example:<br />
* "Round the corners of this rectangle to a radius of .05 inches." <br />
* "Put a hinged door over this cutout." <br />
* "Put rubber feet on this face.”<br />
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering & Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering & Design Services will give you the correct quote.<br><br><br />
'''''To add a note to an object'''''<br />
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note. <br />
#Type the note in the blank text window in the Properties panel. When done, click either arrow above the text box, or any other tool in the Properties panel. <br />
#;[[File:notes_tools_in_face_editor.jpg]]<br />
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.<br />
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time.<br><br><br />
'''''To add a general note'''''<br />
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' [[File:3D_View_-_Part_Tree_button.png|40px]] button.<br />
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.<br />
#Type the note in the bottom text window. In the following example, a note was added to the assembly. <br />
#;[[File:Assembly_Tree_example.png|400px]]<br />
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it.<br><br><br />
'''''To delete a note'''''<br />
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button.<br><br><br />
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''<br />
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View > View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance. <br />
#:[[File:view_notes_window.jpg|500 px]]<br />
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Adding cutouts=<br />
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure.<br><br />
'''See Also:'''<br><br />
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]<br />
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]]<br><br><br />
<br />
===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===<br />
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library. <br />
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''.<br />
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description. <br />
#;[[File:library_manager.jpg|600px]]<br />
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout. <br />
#;[[File:Cursor_changes_when_click_place_item_button.jpg|300px]]<br />
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.<br />
#;[[File:Cursor_stays_to_place_item_multiple_times.jpg|300px]]<br />
#When you are done, press <Esc> or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.<br><br><br />
<br />
===Adding a cutout by selecting it from the Cutout Library and Fasteners menu===<br />
Use this method when you know exactly which cutout you want to load.<br />
#In the Face Editor, drill down through the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''main library''' or '''personal library''' listings, and click on the name of the cutout that you want to load. <br />
#;[[File:Adding cutouts menu.jpg|600px]]<br><br />
#The cursor changes to an image of the cutout; click each location on the face where you want to place the cutout. <br />
#When you are done, press <Esc> or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding "D" port cutouts==<br />
You can add a "D"-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.<br />
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel. <br />
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it. <br />
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding cutouts that cross the edge of a face==<br />
You can configure Designer to allow you to choose to cut the edge of the face when placing an object across a face boundary. <br />
#In [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''']], set '''Error Response''' to ''ASK.'' This will cause Designer to prompt you to choose whether to accept or reject the placement when you draw or move a cutout so that it lies across the boundary.<br />
#Also in Preferences, clear the '''Cut Face''' check box. (If you select the check box, Designer will not give you a choice, but will automatically cut the boundary.)<br />
#;[[File:Cut-face preferences.png]]<br />
#Click '''OK''' to save the Preferences settings. <br />
#:From now on, when you draw or move an object across a boundary, you receive the prompt, as shown below when a rectangle is being created across the panel's top.<br><br />
#:[[File:cut_face_prompt.png]]<br><br />
#:If you choose '''Accept and Cut Face''', the face is cut accordingly:<br><br />
#:[[File:After-cutting-face.png]]<br><br><br />
<br />
=Adding hardware=<br />
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles. <br />
<br />
==Adding self-clinching fasteners==<br />
Protocase uses PEM<sup><small>®</small></sup> brand self-clinching fasteners.<br />
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.<br />
#:The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens. <br />
#:[[File:self-clinching_fastener_selection_dialog.jpg|300px]]<br />
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.<br />
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)<br />
#Select the thread '''Length'''. <br />
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed. <br />
#Select a '''Part Number'''. <br />
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature.<br><br />
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with "ZI".) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones. <br />
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.<br />
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Edit''' button [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press the '''Esc''' key.<br />
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-pem.png|400px|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]<br><br><br />
#:[[File:window-main-pem.png|400px|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]<br><br />
'''See Also''':<br><br />
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding hardware such as handles==<br />
#On the Standard toolbar, click '''Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show and snap to the grid.<br />
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library''', point to '''Hardware''', then select a hardware item.<br />
#When you are done adding hardware, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]].<br />
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles.png|600px|Placing handles]]<br />
#:[[File:window-main-ushape-handles.png|600px|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]<br />
<br />
==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==<br />
====Adding a countersink to a face====<br />
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole. <br />
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel. <br />
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.<br />
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-countersink.png|border]]<br />
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.<br />
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of "100.0° #2" indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)<br />
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.<br />
#;[[File:message-incorrect-cutout-size.png]]<br />
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.<br />
#:[[File:countersink.png]]<br><br><br />
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.<br><br />
<br />
'''''Adding multiple countersinks to a face'''''<br />
*To add multiple countersinks to a face at one time, draw a circle for each hole, click the '''Edit''' button, select all circles, and then click the '''Countersink''' check box.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Adding a tapped hole to a face====<br />
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.<br />
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole. <br />
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box. <br />
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.<br />
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-tapped_hole.png|border]]<br />
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.<br />
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of "2-56 [0.07]" indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07" for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.<br />
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.) <br />
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face.<br><br />
#:[[File:Tapped_hole_in_face_editor.png]]<br><br />
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.<br />
<br><br />
<br />
'''''Adding multiple tapped holes to a face'''''<br />
*To add multiple tapped holes to a face at one time, draw a circle for each hole, click the '''Edit''' button, select all circles, and then click the '''Tapped Hole''' check box.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Adding screws to a face====<br />
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''. <br />
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.<br />
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Replacing screws and PEMs====<br />
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)<br />
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the screw. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it. <br />
#In the Properties panel, notice the new '''Replace...''' button, which includes the part name of the screw. (Only part of the part name is visible on the button; to read the entire name, hover over the button.)<br />
#;[[file:SCREW_INFO.jpg|400px]]<br />
#To replace the screw with a PEM (or a PEM with another PEM), click the button. The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the '''Thread Type''' and '''Part Number''', and then click the '''Place PEM''' button. <br />
''Alternate method'': Right-click a screw and choose '''Properties''' to review and/or replace the screw with a PEM. The Properties window also lets you edit the '''Origin(X)''', '''Origin(Y)''', '''Rotation''', and the side of the face that the screw sticks up out of.<br />
<br />
==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==<br />
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it, then add it to an enclosure.<br><br><br />
'''''To create and save a customized bracket'''''<br />
#Click '''New'''.<br />
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens. <br />
#:[[File:dialog-Brackets_NewAssemblyFromTemplate.jpg|400 px]]<br />
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary. <br />
#:[[File:New4.4.9-Dialog-Brackets-NewAssemblySPECS.jpg|400 px]]<br />
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button. <br />
#:The 3D View window opens.<br />
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the '''Cutout Library Manager''' menu.<br />
#You are prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure); click '''OK''' and then do so. <br />
#:The New Library Item dialog opens. <br />
#:[[File:New_library_item_dialog.jpg|200 px]]<br />
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:<br />
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of enclosure, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you load the U Shape enclosure template, then click the Sub-Assembly button, then click the front face of the enclosure, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is "U Shape by Front - Bottom". ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure the the subassembly name remains unique.'' <br />
#:'''Manufacturer''' <br />
#:'''Part Number''' <br />
#:'''Description''' <br />
#Click '''OK.'''<br />
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.<br><br />
#:'''Note On Bracket Origin and Placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the bracket template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing the bracket on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face.<br><br />
<br />
'''''To place a bracket on the enclosure'''''<br />
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.<br />
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a bracket to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the bracket later, do save the bracket as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.) <br />
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' is selected for the bracket placement.<br />
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the bracket that you want to add to the enclosure. (The customized brackets that you saved to the library are listed in the '''personal library''' section.)<br />
#Click the '''Place Item''' button. <br />
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon. <br />
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the bracket will be placed where you click. You can add multiple brackets in this way.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Manipulating objects=<br />
==Selecting object(s)==<br />
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]<br />
#Do one of the following:<br />
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.<br />
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.<br />
#*To select multiple objects:<br />
#**Click the first object, then down the <Shift> key and click the other objects; or<br />
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects. <br />
#::[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection.png|500px]]<br />
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.<br />
#:[[File:selected_objects.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
==Editing object(s)==<br />
'''''To edit a single object'''''<br><br />
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''. <br />
''or''<br />
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type. <br />
<br><br />
'''''To edit a group'''''<br><br />
You can edit the group as a whole, or you can edit each individual object in the group. To edit the group as a whole, follow the instructions above for a single object. To edit individual objects in a group:<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button in the Properties panel.<br />
#;[[file:editing_a_group1.jpg|border]]<br />
#The group of objects is displayed in the Cutout Editor. This screen is like the Face Editor, but only the group of objects is displayed. You can now edit any of the individual objects in the group.<br />
#;[[file:editing_a_group2.jpg|600px]]<br />
#When you are finished editing the objects in the group, click '''Accept and Close''' [[File:button-acceptclose.png|20px|bottom]] in the Face Editor toolbar. The Cutout Editor closes, and the group is displayed as usual in the Face Editor.<br><br />
'''See Also'''<br />
*To ungroup the items, edit them individually, then regroup the items without leaving the Face Editor, see [[Face_Editor#Group_and_ungroup_objects|Grouping and ungrouping objects]].<br><br><br />
<br />
==Moving object(s)==<br />
To move a single object:<br><br />
#Select the object.<br />
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.<br><br><br />
<br />
To move several objects:<br><br />
#Select all the objects.<br />
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.<br><br><br />
<br />
To move cutouts from one face to another:<br />
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items. <br />
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with. <br />
:For detailed instructions, see:<br />
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]<br />
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Grouping and ungrouping objects==<br />
'''''To group objects'''''<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.<br />
#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the <Shift> key and select each object. <br />
#Click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. <br><br />
'''''To ungroup objects'''''<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.<br />
#Click the group.<br />
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel.<br><br />
'''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement.<br><br><br />
'''See Also'''<br />
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]<br />
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Aligning and distributing objects==<br />
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.<br />
<br />
#Select 2 or more objects.<br />
#In the Properties panel, click an Alignment or Distribute command.<br><br />
'''Alignment'''<br><br />
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects<br><br />
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects<br><br />
<br><br />
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects<br><br />
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects<br><br />
<br><br />
'''''Notes:'''''<br />
*Objects align to the first object selected.<br />
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align.png|600px|thumb|left|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]<br><br />
<br clear=all> <br />
<br />
'''Distribute'''<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects<br><br />
<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects<br><br><br />
<br />
==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select one or more objects.<br />
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button [[File:Button-Cut.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' > '''Cut'''. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button [[File:Button-Copy.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' > '''Copy'''. <br />
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button [[File:Button-Paste.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' > '''Paste'''.<br />
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor. <br />
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.<br />
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|30px|bottom]] or press the <Esc> key when you are done.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Undoing and Redoing actions==<br />
Click the '''Undo''' [[File:undo_button.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button.png]] button in the Face Editor toolbar, or choose '''Undo''' or '''Redo''' from the '''Edit''' menu.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding and managing layers==<br />
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.<br />
<br />
'''Layer Toolbar'''<br />
<br />
Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:<br />
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list. <br />
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.<br />
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.<br />
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.) <br />
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer. <br />
<br />
'''''To add a new layer '''''<br />
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel. <br />
#:[[File:layer_controls_in_face_editor.png]]<br />
#:The Input dialog opens. <br />
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).<br />
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer. <br />
<br />
'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''<br />
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.<br />
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed. <br />
#Paste the object(s).<br />
<br />
'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=<br />
<br />
===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===<br />
#To print a single face, display the face in the Face Editor and choose '''Print To Scale''' from the '''File''' menu. To print all faces of the enclosure, choose the same command in the 3D View window.<br />
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.<br />
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.<br />
#Click '''Print.'''<br />
<br />
===To calibrate the printer===<br />
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.<br />
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button. <br />
#A test page opens.<br />
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle. <br />
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens. <br />
#:[[File:dialog-PrintToScale-Record_Measurements.jpg]]<br />
#If the printed rectangle is not 3" x 3", then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''.<br><br />
<br><br />
<br />
=Exporting and importing face templates=<br />
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer.<br><br />
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].<br />
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.<br />
#Select '''Graphics > Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.<br />
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.<br />
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it. <br />
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.<br />
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics > Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image. <br />
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.<br />
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.<br></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&diff=3090Face Editor2016-09-26T16:57:36Z<p>Stownsend: /* Creating and adding brackets */</p>
<hr />
<div>=Face Editor overview=<br />
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure. <br />
<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels3.png|1000px|Face Editor Window]]<br />
<br />
;2D Menu bar<br />
:Contains File, Edit, Cutout Library and Fasteners, Grid, View, Graphics, and Help menus. <br />
<br />
;2D Standard toolbar<br />
:Contains common commands such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, and Zoom.<br />
<br />
;2D Mode toolbar<br />
:Contains tools to add shapes, text, and images to the face, as well as exclusion and masking zones and construction lines.<br />
<br />
;2D Viewport<br />
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.<br />
<br />
;2D Status bar<br />
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.<br />
<br />
;2D Properties panel<br />
:Displays context-sensitive Help and properties that can be changed for the selected object.<br><br><br />
<br />
===2D Standard Toolbar===<br />
[[File:2D-toolbar.png]]<br><br><br />
From left to right, the buttons are:<br />
{|<br />
| [[File:Button-acceptclose.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Accept'''<br />
| Accept changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Reject button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Reject'''<br />
| Reject changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Cut.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Cut'''<br />
| Cut object(s).<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Copy.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Copy'''<br />
| Copy object(s).<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Paste.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Paste'''<br />
| Paste object(s) that have been cut or copied.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-PartView.png|30px|top]]<br />
| '''Part View'''<br />
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which lists each part, face, and design element: <br />
|-<br />
|<br />
|<br />
| [[File:Window-parttree-ushape-note.png|300px]]<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Zoom_In_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Zoom In'''<br />
|Zoom in on the face. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Zoom Out'''<br />
| Zoom out from the face. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Reset_View_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Reset View'''<br />
| Zoom out from the face. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-togglegrid.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Toggle Grid'''<br />
| Toggle on/off the grid display. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-gridsize.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Grid Size'''<br />
| Change the grid size. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-snapgrid.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Snap to Grid'''<br />
| Toggle on/off snapping to the grid. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Keyslot_undo_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Undo'''<br />
| Undo your last action. .<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Redo_button.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Redo'''<br />
| Repeat your last action. .<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-ViewBack.png|bottom]]<br />
| '''Back'''<br />
| Display the back of the face. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-ViewFront.png|bottom]]<br />
| '''Front'''<br />
| Display the front of the face.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Draw.png|bottom]]<br />
| '''Draw'''<br />
| When dragging the mouse, act on objects (draw, move, etc.). <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Button-Pan.png|bottom]]<br />
| '''Pan'''<br />
| When dragging the mouse, do not act on objects but just pan the face. <br />
|}<br><br><br />
<br />
===Face Editor preferences===<br />
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].<br><br><br />
<br />
=Viewing the face=<br />
<br />
==Panning==<br />
To pan the model or face, do one of the following:<br />
*In the 3D View:<br />
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the model.<br />
::''or''<br />
:*Hold down the <Alt> key, then drag the model.<br><br><br />
*In the Face Editor:<br />
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the face.<br />
::''or''<br />
:*Click and hold down the mouse wheel-button while dragging the face.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Zooming==<br />
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.<br />
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.<br />
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following. <br />
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Zoom_In_button.png|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.<br />
:*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' > '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom.<br><br />
*To zoom in on a particular area:<br />
*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Resetting the view==<br />
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:<br />
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset_View_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.<br />
*Choose '''View''' > '''Reset Zoom'''.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Viewing the front or back of the face==<br />
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, choose '''View''' > '''Toggle Side Showing'''. <br><br />
[[File:Toggle-Side-Showing-command.png|175px]]<br><br />
Or, you can use the 2D Standard toolbar buttons to display either side:<br />
*To display the back of the face, click the '''Inside''' [[File:button-inside.png]] or '''Back''' [[File:Button-ViewBack.png]] button. <br />
*To display the front of the face, click the '''Outside''' [[File:Button-Outside.png]] or '''Front''' [[File:Button-ViewFront.png]] button. <br />
(If an enclosure is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Inside''' and '''Outside'''. If a panel is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Back''' and '''Front'''.) Whichever button you click becomes shaded to indicate that it is in effect.<br />
<br />
=Coordinate System=<br />
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.<br />
<br />
[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]]<br><br><br />
<br />
===Choosing the Units of Measure===<br />
<br />
You can set the default unit of measure. <br />
<br />
#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.<br />
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.<br />
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM). <br />
#Click '''OK.'''<br><br><br><br />
<br />
=Drawing shapes=<br />
<br />
==Selecting the drawing (object) type==<br />
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''.<br><br />
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the "Mode" label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''.<br><br />
#:[[File:button-mode.png||60px|bottom]]<br><br />
#:The Draw Type window opens:<br><br />
#:[[File:Mode_menu.png]]<br><br />
#Click the button that you want to use as the default. The button label changes to indicate the current object type.<br><br><br />
<br />
===Using the Cutout object type===<br />
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera.<br><br />
'''See Also:'''<br />
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]<br><br><br />
<br />
===Using the Graphic object type===<br />
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.<br />
<br />
====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====<br />
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.<br />
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press <Enter>. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.). <br />
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:<br />
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is "None"; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.<br />
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads. <br />
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish. <br />
:*The printed area must be no more than 46"x46", and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24" high.<br />
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface. <br />
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed.<br><br />
<br />
=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====<br />
#Choose '''Edit''' > '''Preferences'''.<br />
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:<br />
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)<br />
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)<br />
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to "Graphic" for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.) <br />
#Click '''OK'''.<br><br />
<br />
=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====<br />
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change. <br />
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu. <br />
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face.<br><br />
'''See Also:''' <br />
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]<br />
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]]<br><br><br />
<br />
===Using the Exclusion object type===<br />
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.<br />
<br />
===Using the Masking object type===<br />
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust.<br><br />
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.<br />
#:[[File:Select_Draw_Type_masking.png|400px]]<br />
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked.<br><br />
'''Notes'''<br><br />
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.<br />
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1".<br><br><br />
<br />
===Using the Construct object type===<br />
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing circles==<br />
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.<br />
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.<br />
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|30px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing ellipses==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.<br />
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.<br />
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|30px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing rectangles and squares==<br />
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.<br />
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.<br />
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|30px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing custom paths==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path.png|30px]].<br />
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.<br />
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Creating an arc using the Path tool====<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.<br />
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment). <br />
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press <a>.<br />
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.<br />
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer. <br />
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size. <br />
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing <A>). <br />
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.)<br><br><br />
<br />
====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====<br />
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.<br />
<br />
'''''To merge two or more objects'''''<br />
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object. <br />
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE1.jpg]]<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.) <br />
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE2.jpg]]<br />
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu. <br />
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE3.jpg]]<br />
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout. <br />
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE4.jpg]]<br><br><br />
'''''To edit a merged object'''''<br><br />
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right. <br />
:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE5.jpg]] [[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE6.jpg]]<br><br><br />
'''Note''' If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. <br><br><br />
'''''To trim two or more objects'''''<br><br />
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.<br />
#Place a circle on the face.<br />
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it. <br />
#:[[File:example-Trim1.jpg]]<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.<br />
#:[[File:example-Trim2.jpg]]<br />
#Click the '''Trim''' button.<br />
#:The outline of each object is outlined, the cursor icon turns into an eraser (not shown in these examples).<br />
#:[[File:example-Trim3.jpg]]<br />
#Use the eraser to eliminate the lines you do not want.<br />
#:[[File:example-Trim4.jpg]]<br />
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode. <span style="color:#ff0000">'''Important!'''</span> If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved.<br> <br />
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such. <br />
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]<br />
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:<br />
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1.jpg]]<br><br />
'''See Also: '''<br />
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]<br />
<br />
<br />
====Solving problems with merging objects====<br />
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.<br />
<br><br><br />
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom:<br><br />
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1.jpg]]<br><br />
If you then merge them and click <Esc>, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view. <br />
<br><br><br />
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic. <br />
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle. <br />
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2.jpg]]<br />
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well. <br />
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:<br />
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3.jpg|300px]]<br />
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4.jpg|300px]]<br />
#When completed, click the <Esc> key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing lines==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.<br />
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.<br />
#Drag to set the end of the line.<br />
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Drawing arcs==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.<br />
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc. <br />
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc. <br />
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc. <br />
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding text==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.<br />
#Click on the face and begin typing.<br />
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''<Enter>''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time. <br />
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. <br />
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''', and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Adding special characters====<br />
You can add any special character such as the registered trademark symbol to text, as follows. (The <Alt> character code method is not supported.) <br />
#Copy the character from any site such as [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script Wikipedia] or from the Character Map application in Windows. <br />
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:<br />
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example.png|border|500px]]<br />
#:'''Tip''' The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:<br />
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example2.png|border|500px]]<br><br><br />
<br />
'''See Also'''<br><br />
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]'''<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding images==<br />
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF). Vector files (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed. '''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/ '''Spotting the Difference'''].<br><br />
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].<br />
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:image_button.png|50px]] on the Mode toolbar.<br />
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed. <br />
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.) <br />
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:<br />
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).<br />
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received. <br />
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves. <br />
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.<br />
'''Notes''': <br><br />
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer. <br />
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins. <br><br><br />
====Exporting images====<br />
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.<br />
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export. <br />
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens. <br />
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. <br><br><br />
<br />
=Using the Measure tool=<br />
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one.<br> <br />
'''See Also:'''<br />
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]<br />
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure.png|40px|bottom]]<br />
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). <br />
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.<br />
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1.png|600px]]<br><br><br />
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.<br><br />
<br />
==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==<br />
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.<br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure.png|40px|bottom]]<br />
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.<br />
#Click the centre of the circle cutout. <br />
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.<br />
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure1.png|500px]]<br />
#Enter "5" in '''x difference''' and "-3" in '''y difference'''.<br />
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)<br />
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure-moved1.png|500px]]<br><br />
<br />
==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==<br />
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object. <br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure.png|40px|bottom]]<br />
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). <br />
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points. <br />
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1.png|500 px]]<br />
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of "1" and an '''x difference''' of "1".<br />
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel.<br><br />
<br />
==Displaying measurements==<br />
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes.<br><br><br />
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points'''''<br><br />
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:button-Dimension-ModePanel-FaceEditor.jpg|40px|bottom]]<br />
#:The distance of "0.000" is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint. <br />
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor. <br />
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed. <br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-1.jpg|border]]<br />
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.<br />
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green. <br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-2.jpg|border]]<br />
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:<br />
#::The distance between the two points;<br />
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and<br />
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).<br />
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure. <br />
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed. The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle. <br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-3.jpg|border]]<br />
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse. <br />
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way. <br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-4.jpg|border]]<br />
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:<br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-5.jpg|border]]<br />
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:<br />
#:[[File:example-Dimension-6.jpg|border]]<br><br><br />
<br />
'''''To delete a displayed measurement'''''<br><br />
Do either of the following:<br />
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu. <br />
*Highlight the line and press the <Delete> key.<br><br><br />
'''''See Also''''' <br />
*[[Face Editor#Measuring distances|Using the Measure tool]]<br><br><br />
<br />
=Using the grid=<br />
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects.<br><br><br />
<br />
Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel. <br />
<br />
===Turn on/off the Grid===<br />
#Do one of the following:<br />
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid.png|bottom]]<br />
#*On the Grid menu, select '''Toggle Grid'''.<br />
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.<br />
{{Note|The '''Snap to Grid''' option is automatically enabled when the grid is turned on.}}<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid.png|600px|thumb|left|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]<br />
<br clear=all><br />
<br />
===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===<br />
'''Note: Snap to Grid''' is automatically enabled when the grid is turned on.<br><br />
#Do one of the following:<br />
#*On the Standard toolbar, click '''Snap to Grid''' [[File:button-snapgrid.png|bottom]]<br />
#*On the Grid menu, click '''Snap to Grid'''.<br />
#Repeat to toggle the state of '''Snap to Grid'''.<br><br><br />
<br />
===Changing grid size and offset===<br />
#On the Standard toolbar, click [[File:button-gridsize.png|bottom]] or choose '''Grid Size''' from the '''Grid''' menu.<br />
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:<br />
:[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize.png|left]]<br />
<br clear=all> <br />
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.<br />
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.<br />
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.<br />
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.<br />
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.<br />
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.<br />
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset.png|500px|thumb|left|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]<br />
<br clear=all><br />
<br />
=Managing object properties=<br />
<br />
[[File:top_of_properties_panel.jpg|thumb|Top of Properties panel]]<br />
<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkcreened circle]]<br />
<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkscreened text]]<br />
<br />
===Top of Properties Panel===<br />
* Click the line that reads "Click to Expand Context Help" to read usage tips for the current object you are editing (circle, ellipse, text, etcetera). Click anywhere in the upper panel again to hide the help. <br />
* For help on the Layers buttons and its toolbar, please see [[Face Editor#Adding and managing layers|Adding and managing layers]].<br />
* The checkbox "On This Side" is selected when the object is on the side that you are editing. Clear the check box to move the object to the other side of the face. <br />
<br />
*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.<br />
<br />
===Fill===<br />
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.<br />
<br />
===Line Thickness===<br />
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.<br />
<br />
===Color===<br />
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu. <br />
<br />
===Type===<br />
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.<br />
* Object types include:<br />
:Cutout<br />
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)<br />
:Exclusion<br />
:Construct<br />
<br />
===Origin===<br />
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.<br />
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.<br />
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.<br />
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:<br />
:'''Circles''' -- centre<br />
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre<br />
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin<br />
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner<br />
:'''Paths''' -- start point<br />
:'''Lines''' -- start point<br />
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner<br><br />
'''See Also'''<br><br />
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]<br />
<br />
===Circles===<br />
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.<br />
===Ellipses===<br />
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).<br />
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).<br />
===Rectangles===<br />
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.<br />
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise<br />
===Lines===<br />
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.<br />
===Images===<br />
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.<br />
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise<br />
===Text===<br />
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise<br />
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].<br />
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.<br />
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.<br />
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.<br />
<br />
===Path===<br />
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding notes==<br />
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering & Design Services team. For example:<br />
* "Round the corners of this rectangle to a radius of .05 inches." <br />
* "Put a hinged door over this cutout." <br />
* "Put rubber feet on this face.”<br />
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering & Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering & Design Services will give you the correct quote.<br><br><br />
'''''To add a note to an object'''''<br />
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note. <br />
#Type the note in the blank text window in the Properties panel. When done, click either arrow above the text box, or any other tool in the Properties panel. <br />
#;[[File:notes_tools_in_face_editor.jpg]]<br />
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.<br />
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time.<br><br><br />
'''''To add a general note'''''<br />
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' [[File:3D_View_-_Part_Tree_button.png|40px]] button.<br />
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.<br />
#Type the note in the bottom text window. In the following example, a note was added to the assembly. <br />
#;[[File:Assembly_Tree_example.png|400px]]<br />
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it.<br><br><br />
'''''To delete a note'''''<br />
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button.<br><br><br />
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''<br />
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View > View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance. <br />
#:[[File:view_notes_window.jpg|500 px]]<br />
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Adding cutouts=<br />
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure.<br><br />
'''See Also:'''<br><br />
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]<br />
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]]<br><br><br />
<br />
===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===<br />
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library. <br />
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''.<br />
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description. <br />
#;[[File:library_manager.jpg|600px]]<br />
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout. <br />
#;[[File:Cursor_changes_when_click_place_item_button.jpg|300px]]<br />
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.<br />
#;[[File:Cursor_stays_to_place_item_multiple_times.jpg|300px]]<br />
#When you are done, press <Esc> or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.<br><br><br />
<br />
===Adding a cutout by selecting it from the Cutout Library and Fasteners menu===<br />
Use this method when you know exactly which cutout you want to load.<br />
#In the Face Editor, drill down through the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''main library''' or '''personal library''' listings, and click on the name of the cutout that you want to load. <br />
#;[[File:Adding cutouts menu.jpg|600px]]<br><br />
#The cursor changes to an image of the cutout; click each location on the face where you want to place the cutout. <br />
#When you are done, press <Esc> or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding "D" port cutouts==<br />
You can add a "D"-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.<br />
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel. <br />
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it. <br />
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding cutouts that cross the edge of a face==<br />
You can configure Designer to allow you to choose to cut the edge of the face when placing an object across a face boundary. <br />
#In [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''']], set '''Error Response''' to ''ASK.'' This will cause Designer to prompt you to choose whether to accept or reject the placement when you draw or move a cutout so that it lies across the boundary.<br />
#Also in Preferences, clear the '''Cut Face''' check box. (If you select the check box, Designer will not give you a choice, but will automatically cut the boundary.)<br />
#;[[File:Cut-face preferences.png]]<br />
#Click '''OK''' to save the Preferences settings. <br />
#:From now on, when you draw or move an object across a boundary, you receive the prompt, as shown below when a rectangle is being created across the panel's top.<br><br />
#:[[File:cut_face_prompt.png]]<br><br />
#:If you choose '''Accept and Cut Face''', the face is cut accordingly:<br><br />
#:[[File:After-cutting-face.png]]<br><br><br />
<br />
=Adding hardware=<br />
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles. <br />
<br />
==Adding self-clinching fasteners==<br />
Protocase uses PEM<sup><small>®</small></sup> brand self-clinching fasteners.<br />
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.<br />
#:The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens. <br />
#:[[File:self-clinching_fastener_selection_dialog.jpg|300px]]<br />
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.<br />
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)<br />
#Select the thread '''Length'''. <br />
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed. <br />
#Select a '''Part Number'''. <br />
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature.<br><br />
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with "ZI".) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones. <br />
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.<br />
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Edit''' button [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]] or press the '''Esc''' key.<br />
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-pem.png|400px|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]<br><br><br />
#:[[File:window-main-pem.png|400px|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]<br><br />
'''See Also''':<br><br />
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding hardware such as handles==<br />
#On the Standard toolbar, click '''Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid.png|35px|bottom]] to show and snap to the grid.<br />
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library''', point to '''Hardware''', then select a hardware item.<br />
#When you are done adding hardware, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]].<br />
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles.png|600px|Placing handles]]<br />
#:[[File:window-main-ushape-handles.png|600px|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]<br />
<br />
==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==<br />
====Adding a countersink to a face====<br />
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole. <br />
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel. <br />
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.<br />
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-countersink.png|border]]<br />
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.<br />
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of "100.0° #2" indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)<br />
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.<br />
#;[[File:message-incorrect-cutout-size.png]]<br />
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.<br />
#:[[File:countersink.png]]<br><br><br />
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.<br><br />
<br />
'''''Adding multiple countersinks to a face'''''<br />
*To add multiple countersinks to a face at one time, draw a circle for each hole, click the '''Edit''' button, select all circles, and then click the '''Countersink''' check box.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Adding a tapped hole to a face====<br />
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.<br />
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole. <br />
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box. <br />
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.<br />
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-tapped_hole.png|border]]<br />
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.<br />
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of "2-56 [0.07]" indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07" for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.<br />
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.) <br />
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face.<br><br />
#:[[File:Tapped_hole_in_face_editor.png]]<br><br />
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.<br />
<br><br />
<br />
'''''Adding multiple tapped holes to a face'''''<br />
*To add multiple tapped holes to a face at one time, draw a circle for each hole, click the '''Edit''' button, select all circles, and then click the '''Tapped Hole''' check box.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Adding screws to a face====<br />
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''. <br />
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.<br />
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener.<br><br><br />
<br />
====Replacing screws and PEMs====<br />
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)<br />
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the screw. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it. <br />
#In the Properties panel, notice the new '''Replace...''' button, which includes the part name of the screw. (Only part of the part name is visible on the button; to read the entire name, hover over the button.)<br />
#;[[file:SCREW_INFO.jpg|400px]]<br />
#To replace the screw with a PEM (or a PEM with another PEM), click the button. The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the '''Thread Type''' and '''Part Number''', and then click the '''Place PEM''' button. <br />
''Alternate method'': Right-click a screw and choose '''Properties''' to review and/or replace the screw with a PEM. The Properties window also lets you edit the '''Origin(X)''', '''Origin(Y)''', '''Rotation''', and the side of the face that the screw sticks up out of.<br />
<br />
==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==<br />
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following two procedures, you create a bracket and save it, then add it to an enclosure.<br><br><br />
'''''To create and save a customized bracket'''''<br />
#Click '''New'''.<br />
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens. <br />
#:[[File:dialog-Brackets_NewAssemblyFromTemplate.jpg|400 px]]<br />
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary. <br />
#:[[File:New4.4.9-Dialog-Brackets-NewAssemblySPECS.jpg|400 px]]<br />
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button. <br />
#:The 3D View window opens.<br />
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the '''Cutout Library Manager''' menu.<br />
#You are prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure); click '''OK''' and then do so. <br />
#:The New Library Item dialog opens. <br />
#:[[File:New_library_item_dialog.jpg|200 px]]<br />
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:<br />
#:'''Name''': Note that the default name provides an indication of the mating face (such as "L Bracket by Front - Bottom" or "L Bracket by Base - Top"), but we recommend that you change this to ensure it remains unique. <br />
#:'''Manufacturer''' <br />
#:'''Part Number''' <br />
#:'''Description''' <br />
#Click '''OK.'''<br />
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.<br><br />
#:'''Note On Bracket Origin and Placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the bracket template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing the bracket on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face.<br><br />
<br />
'''''To place a bracket on the enclosure'''''<br />
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.<br />
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a bracket to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the bracket later, do save the bracket as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.) <br />
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' is selected for the bracket placement.<br />
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the bracket that you want to add to the enclosure. (The customized brackets that you saved to the library are listed in the '''personal library''' section.)<br />
#Click the '''Place Item''' button. <br />
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon. <br />
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the bracket will be placed where you click. You can add multiple brackets in this way.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Manipulating objects=<br />
==Selecting object(s)==<br />
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit.png|40px|bottom]]<br />
#Do one of the following:<br />
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.<br />
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.<br />
#*To select multiple objects:<br />
#**Click the first object, then down the <Shift> key and click the other objects; or<br />
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects. <br />
#::[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection.png|500px]]<br />
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.<br />
#:[[File:selected_objects.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
==Editing object(s)==<br />
'''''To edit a single object'''''<br><br />
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''. <br />
''or''<br />
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type. <br />
<br><br />
'''''To edit a group'''''<br><br />
You can edit the group as a whole, or you can edit each individual object in the group. To edit the group as a whole, follow the instructions above for a single object. To edit individual objects in a group:<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button in the Properties panel.<br />
#;[[file:editing_a_group1.jpg|border]]<br />
#The group of objects is displayed in the Cutout Editor. This screen is like the Face Editor, but only the group of objects is displayed. You can now edit any of the individual objects in the group.<br />
#;[[file:editing_a_group2.jpg|600px]]<br />
#When you are finished editing the objects in the group, click '''Accept and Close''' [[File:button-acceptclose.png|20px|bottom]] in the Face Editor toolbar. The Cutout Editor closes, and the group is displayed as usual in the Face Editor.<br><br />
'''See Also'''<br />
*To ungroup the items, edit them individually, then regroup the items without leaving the Face Editor, see [[Face_Editor#Group_and_ungroup_objects|Grouping and ungrouping objects]].<br><br><br />
<br />
==Moving object(s)==<br />
To move a single object:<br><br />
#Select the object.<br />
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.<br><br><br />
<br />
To move several objects:<br><br />
#Select all the objects.<br />
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.<br><br><br />
<br />
To move cutouts from one face to another:<br />
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items. <br />
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with. <br />
:For detailed instructions, see:<br />
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]<br />
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Grouping and ungrouping objects==<br />
'''''To group objects'''''<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.<br />
#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the <Shift> key and select each object. <br />
#Click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. <br><br />
'''''To ungroup objects'''''<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.<br />
#Click the group.<br />
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel.<br><br />
'''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement.<br><br><br />
'''See Also'''<br />
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]<br />
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Aligning and distributing objects==<br />
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.<br />
<br />
#Select 2 or more objects.<br />
#In the Properties panel, click an Alignment or Distribute command.<br><br />
'''Alignment'''<br><br />
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects<br><br />
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects<br><br />
<br><br />
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects<br><br />
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects<br><br />
<br><br />
'''''Notes:'''''<br />
*Objects align to the first object selected.<br />
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.<br />
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align.png|600px|thumb|left|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]<br><br />
<br clear=all> <br />
<br />
'''Distribute'''<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects<br><br />
<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally<br><br />
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects<br><br><br />
<br />
==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==<br />
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select one or more objects.<br />
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button [[File:Button-Cut.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' > '''Cut'''. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button [[File:Button-Copy.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' > '''Copy'''. <br />
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button [[File:Button-Paste.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' > '''Paste'''.<br />
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor. <br />
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.<br />
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit.png|30px|bottom]] or press the <Esc> key when you are done.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Undoing and Redoing actions==<br />
Click the '''Undo''' [[File:undo_button.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button.png]] button in the Face Editor toolbar, or choose '''Undo''' or '''Redo''' from the '''Edit''' menu.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Adding and managing layers==<br />
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.<br />
<br />
'''Layer Toolbar'''<br />
<br />
Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:<br />
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list. <br />
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.<br />
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.<br />
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.) <br />
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer. <br />
<br />
'''''To add a new layer '''''<br />
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel. <br />
#:[[File:layer_controls_in_face_editor.png]]<br />
#:The Input dialog opens. <br />
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).<br />
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer. <br />
<br />
'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''<br />
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.<br />
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed. <br />
#Paste the object(s).<br />
<br />
'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=<br />
<br />
===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===<br />
#To print a single face, display the face in the Face Editor and choose '''Print To Scale''' from the '''File''' menu. To print all faces of the enclosure, choose the same command in the 3D View window.<br />
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.<br />
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.<br />
#Click '''Print.'''<br />
<br />
===To calibrate the printer===<br />
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.<br />
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button. <br />
#A test page opens.<br />
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle. <br />
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens. <br />
#:[[File:dialog-PrintToScale-Record_Measurements.jpg]]<br />
#If the printed rectangle is not 3" x 3", then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''.<br><br />
<br><br />
<br />
=Exporting and importing face templates=<br />
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer.<br><br />
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].<br />
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.<br />
#Select '''Graphics > Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.<br />
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.<br />
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it. <br />
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.<br />
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics > Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image. <br />
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.<br />
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.<br></div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Centering_text_on_a_face&diff=3084Centering text on a face2016-09-26T15:35:16Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div>This tutorial shows how to use snap points to center text on a face vertically, horizontally, or both.<br><br><br />
:'''Tip''': This procedure requires that you identify the center of both the text box that you are centering and another object that you use as a reference point. To correctly identify a center, you might have to enlarge the view. For example, at this View size, the Measure pointer does not snap to the exact center of the object, even when it turns green...<br><br />
:[[File:Center_text_tutorial_b1a.png|500px]]<br><br />
:...but it does when you zoom in.<br><br />
:[[File:center_text_tutorial_b2.jpg|500px]]<br><br><br />
:In the following examples, text and objects are shown at their normal size in order to show the entire face. <br />
<br />
===To center text horizontally===<br />
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Text''' tool [[File:tool-text.png|40px]] and type the text that you want to center on the face. It does not matter if the text is too small to read.<br />
#:[[File:center_text_tutorial_1.jpg|500px]]<br />
#Click the '''Measure''' tool [[File:tool-measure.png|40px]].<br><br />
#:The pointer turns to a red circle, which turns green when it is moved over a snap point. Center snap points are in the center of each edge of the face, the center of the face, and in the center of any object that is already centered, such as the stud on the front panel of a rackmount enclosure.<br><br />
#:When you are centering the text horizontally, snap to the center point of the top or bottom edge of the face, or to the center point of an object that is already centered horizontally on the face.<br><br />
#:In this example, the pointer is near the center of the bottom edge of the face, but it has not yet snapped to the center point, so it is still red:<br />
#:[[File:center_text_tutorial_2.jpg|500px]]<br />
#:Now the pointer has snapped to the center point of the bottom edge of the face, so it has turned green:<br />
#:[[File:center_text_tutorial_3.jpg|500px]]<br />
#When you have moved the pointer so that it snaps to your chosen center point, click the mouse to anchor it there. <br />
#Move the Measure pointer to the text, and click it when it snaps to the center point of the text box. <br />
#:[[File:center_text_tutorial_4.jpg|500px]]<br />
#Change the '''x difference''' to "0" and press <Enter>. <br />
#:[[File:center_text_tutorial_5.jpg|500px]]<br />
The text is now centered horizontally on the face.<br />
<br />
===To center text vertically===<br />
Follow the same general procedure as for centering text horizontally, but with the following changes:<br />
*Do not use the center of the top or bottom edge as a reference point, but instead use the center of the left or right edge.<br />
*In step 5, change the '''y difference''' to 0. (Do not change the '''x difference'''.)<br />
<br />
===To center text both horizontally and vertically===<br />
#Enter the text, then click the '''Measure''' tool. <br />
#Click the center snap point of the face. <br />
#Click the center snap point of the text box. <br />
#In the Properties panel, change the '''distance''' to 0 and press <Enter>. (Note that this causes '''x difference''' and '''y difference''' to automatically change to 0 as well.)<br />
#:[[File:center_text_tutorial_a1.jpg|500px]]<br />
#:The text is now centered both vertically and horizontally:<br />
#:[[File:center_text_tutorial_a2.jpg|500px]]</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=DRAFT_-_Design_Considerations_for_Computer_Enclosures_Revision&diff=3071DRAFT - Design Considerations for Computer Enclosures Revision2016-09-26T14:42:32Z<p>Stownsend: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''DRAFT - Design Considerations for Computer Enclosures'''<br><br><br />
Awaiting 2 items: (1) changes desired by Doug Milburn (2) file corrections in [http://www.protocase.com/pdf/Motherboard_enclosure_tutorial_2D_dxf_CAD_files.zip '''DXF'''] and [http://www.protocase.com/pdf/Download_related_CAD_drawings_3D_SLDPRT.zip '''SLDPRT'''] <br />
<br />
===Introduction===<br />
This paper covers essential considerations for computer enclosure design, whether you use Protocase Designer or another CAD program. Although the examples given are for ATX and Mini-ITX motherboards, the concepts and procedures apply to enclosures for all motherboards and custom-built circuit boards. The most common configuration is used, in which the board is mounted horizontally on the base of the enclosure and the I/O connectors are accessed through the rear of the enclosure. Key tasks are to design the mounting pattern on the base, and the openings for the I/O connector and card slot(s) on the rear panel. <br><br />
<br />
'''Note''': If you are planning to create an ATX or Mini-ITX computer enclosure with Protocase Designer, you can use Designer templates that include the motherboard layout and/or the hardware cutouts that are referenced in this paper. The templates and cutouts will save you the time and trouble of measuring dimensions for many items in the enclosure. Also, if you have a .DXF file of the PCB drawing, you can import the DXF into Designer to get the mounting hole locations and to check the fit. <br />
<br />
====Terms Used====<br />
*'''PCB''': Printed Circuit Board, either plain or populated with components. <br />
*'''Motherboard''': The PCB for a computer, containing the CPU (Central Processing Unit). <br />
*'''I/O''': Input/Output device for computer peripherals, such as a USB (Universal Serial Bus) or a PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) expansion card. The enclosure design includes cutouts for connectors on the I/O. <br />
*'''Connector''': The part of a cable that plugs into a port or interface to connect one device to another. Connector types include DB, DIN, and Centronics.<br><br><br />
<br />
===The Design Process===<br />
Overall dimensions, mounting points (hole patterns), PCI card details, and I/O connector block areas are standardized on all ATX and Mini-ITX form factors. The drawings below show the overall dimensions and mounting points for these boards. To locate the board correctly within your enclosure, you must provide sufficient clearance between the edges of the board and the enclosure walls and other components. This includes calculating the minimum clearances between the edges of the motherboard and fans, drives, cables, and the enclosure walls; the thickness of enclosure walls; and the height of standoffs. '''Note''': For greater detail on the drawings used in this paper, you can download them in either [http://www.protocase.com/pdf/Motherboard_enclosure_tutorial_2D_dxf_CAD_files.zip '''DXF'''] or [http://www.protocase.com/pdf/Download_related_CAD_drawings_3D_SLDPRT.zip '''SLDPRT'''] format.<br><br><br />
<br />
[[File:MB_tutorial_ATX_both_images.png|frame|center|'''''ATX Motherboard with Seven PCI Cards''''']]<br><br />
<br />
[[File:MB_tutorial_MiniITX_both_images.png|frame|center|'''''Mini-ITX Motherboard with a Single PCI Card''''']]<br><br />
<br />
===Motherboard Mounting Considerations===<br />
Motherboards must be attached to the enclosure with standoff fasteners, raising the board above the floor of the enclosure to avoid contact of parts on the underside with the metal casing, as shown below.<br><br />
[[File: MB_tutorial_image_Min_Offsets_Bottom.png|center]]<br><br />
<br />
In addition, if you are making your own board, components may be mounted on both sides of the board. In either of these cases, you will need to know the distance between the board and the enclosure. Because standoffs extend through the enclosure wall, you must subtract the the thickness of the sheet metal, plus 0.010” allowance for manufacturing tolerance, from the standoff length. A 0.375" standoff mounted in a 14-gauge (0.075") enclosure wall will provide only 0.30" clearance to the surface of the board, and less if the metal is thicker. Standard motherboard mounting holes accept a 6-32 thread size, and a 3/8" standoff should be suitable for most boards. The use of PEMs is the standard method to achieve this. If you do not use 6-32 x 3/8" standoffs, take care to consider surrounding PCI card tab slots and the height of cutouts for the I/O block and PCI card cutouts.<br><br />
<br />
If you are adding spacers, Protocase provides spacers (female-to-female connectors) that are designed to work with the <br />
FH-632-4ZI threaded stud or the non-zinc version. (They are included in the Protocase Designer computer enclosure templates, and with the cutouts for the ATX and Mini-ITX PEMs.) When building your own custom enclosure, you can add them to your design by using the 6-32 x 3/8" standoffs for the motherboard and adding a note that you need the spacers as well. We use a very short stud that you can screw the spacers into, so if your motherboard does not support one of the holes, you can just not put that spacer in and it will not interfere with your board. As noted earlier in this document, ensure that they are not placed too close to the sides or top of the enclosure. <br />
<br />
====Tips on optimizing your PCB design====<br />
If you are sourcing your PCB as an off-the-shelf item, then you have no control over the location of board connectors or mounting holes. Most boards are designed with mechanical mounting in mind, but if you are designing your board from scratch, make sure that mounting hardware on the board (such as PCB mounting holes and panel mount connectors) is not so close to the wall that it would interfere with the enclosure bend radius, which would make it difficult if not impossible to manufacture.<br><br />
<br />
For example, below are two boards, each with two mounting holes (indicated with a red arrow) and a connector. On board (A), the mounting holes are located 0.15" from the edge of the board. The difficulty with board (A) is that it must be placed close enough to the rear panel to allow the connector to pass through it. Because the mounting holes are so close to the edge of the board, the mounting hardware (usually a PEM) will be too close to the edge of the enclosure and will interfere with the enclosure bend radius. Board (B) is done propertly; the mounting holes are far enough back from the edge of the board to prevent any interference.<br><br />
[[File: MB_tutorial_image_re_mounting_holes.png|center]]<br><br />
<br />
Likewise, the board edge must not be flush with any connector that is going to be mounted flush with the side of the enclosure. In the example below, the connector on board (A) is mounted so close to the edge of the board that the board will have to be mounted with its edge just touching the enclosure side. Because there is no allowance for manufacturing variability, the board could get jammed into position when it is mounted, inducing stress on the board and compromising its electrical integrity. Board (B) on the right is done properly.<br><br />
[[File:MB_tutorial_image_re_panel.png|center]]<br><br />
<br />
A good rule of thumb is to leave at least 0.375" between the center of a mounting hole and the edge of the board. If there is less than that, contact [[mailto: info@protocase.com Protocase Engineering & Design Services]] to see if it can be manufactured. (The precise allowance depends on the size of the tool used to insert the PEM and how close to the edge the PEM is allowed. In Protocase Designer, PEMs and bends have exclusion zones displayed in red, and you will receive a warning if you place a PEM too close to a bend.)<br><br />
<br />
When the I/O is accessed from the lower edge of the motherboard (as it is with ATX and Mini-ITX boards), the board edge should be offset at least 0.065" from the inner face of the enclosure wall. This accommodates both the I/O plate adaptor (a small metal plate that comes with the motherboard and mounts over the I/O connectors) and the metal brackets on the PCI cards.<br><br />
<br />
Allow a minimum 0.25" clearance from the other board edges to their corresponding side panels, from the board to other parts such as flanges and fasteners, and from the top of the highest component to the inside of the top of the enclosure. (If you intend to use a fan-cooled processor, see the discussion on fan clearance later in this paper.) If you use smaller clearances, be sure to investigate every possible interference, and discuss it with [[mailto: info@protocase.com Protocase Engineering & Design Services]] before submitting your design for production.<br><br><br />
<br />
===Calculating Connector Cutout Locations===<br />
If the standoffs hold a circuit board with a connector on the rear of the enclosure, calculate the location of the bottom of the connector cutout by adding:<br />
:*the length of the standoff. Note that in this case you need not calculate the thickness of the enclosure bottom, because a 1/2" standoff is 1/2" from the outside to the top of the standoff sitting inside the box. You need to subtract the enclosure thickness only when you need to know how much free space runs under the board to the inside of the enclosure bottom. <br />
:*the height of the circuit board<br />
:*the distance from the bottom of the circuit board to the bottom of the connector <br />
:*0.010” tolerance<br><br><br />
[[File:MB_tutorial_parts_to_measure.png|center]]<br><br><br />
<br />
===Vents and Fans===<br />
Adequate ventilation must be designed into the enclosure to avoid overheating. When designing fan and vent placement, align intake and exhaust vents to take advantage of the current that they create. It is best to arrange the vent cutouts so that air will flow across the top of the board on its way through your enclosure. The figure below shows suggested placement of ventilation cutouts and enclosure exhaust fans in an ITX enclosure.<br><br />
[[File: MB_tutorial_ATX_vents_fan.png|center]]<br><br><br />
<br />
Vent fans are rated by the number of cubic feet of cooling air they move per minute (CFM), and it's important to buy a large enough fan for your enclosure. The required CFM can be calculated as follows:<br><br />
:CFM = 3.16 x Max Heat / T<br><br />
::Where:<br><br />
::* CFM (Cubic Feet per Minute) is the volume, and is the rating by which fans are purchased;<br />
::* Max Heat is the maximum sustained power dissipation (in watts) of boards and components inside the enclosure;<br />
::* T is the maximum allowable temperature rise (in degrees Fahrenheit).<br><br />
<br />
To maximize the effect of ventilation airflow, make sure that the only openings in your enclosure are those that will be filled by switches, connectors, or panel display features. Extraneous holes in the enclosure panels can cause disruption of natural convection currents, resulting in less effective cooling of the processors. If you intend to use a fan-cooled processor with very little clearance between the fan and the enclosure wall, use fans that pull air directionally across the processor heat sink, rather than down onto the top of the sink.<br><br />
<br />
Designs with air intake cutouts in the bottom panel should include feet to raise the enclosure off of its support surface. If you have bottom panel cutouts, place them outside the perimeter of the motherboard, since cutouts placed directly beneath the motherboard can allow objects to accidentally poke up through the spaces and contact the board, causing unwanted damage.<br><br><br />
<br />
===PCI Cards and Tab Slots===<br />
The diagrams below detail the standard slot-style cutouts for PCI card access for ATX and Mini-ITX boards. Add a flange on the top edge of the rear panel to allow the PCI card bracket(s) to be fastened. Screw holes should be placed at the dimensions shown for the screw opening on the top of the PCI card brackets. Draw the holes with a diameter of 0.1065" and add a note to “tap with 6-32 thread” because there is insufficient space to use a PEM nut here. You may also wish to add a vertical flange to the cover, to hide the gap between the cover and the flange with the screws. (In the Protocase Designer templates, both flanges are included.)<br />
<br />
[[File:MB_tutorial_image_ATX_rear_panel_cutouts.png|frame|'''''I/O and PCI Cutouts for Rear Panel of ATX Enclosure'''''|center]]<br><br />
<br />
[[File:MB_tutorial_MiniITX_base_slots.png|frame|'''''Mini-ITX Base with Card Slot Detail for 3/8” Standoffs'''''|center]]<br><br />
<br />
[[File:MB_tutorial_Righthand_view.png|frame|'''''Right-hand View of Mini-ITX Motherboard and PCI Card'''''|center]]<br><br />
<br />
When designing the enclosure base, be sure to accommodate the tabs found on the bottom of PCI card brackets. These tabs are designed to fit into a slot in the base to help secure the card. The following drawings show the ATX (left) and Mini-ITX (right) enclosure bases, with the PCI Card slot detail for 3/8" standoffs. This slot design applies if you are using the recommended 3/8"-high standoffs, but can be avoided by using standoffs that are 7/16" or longer. If you decide to use shorter standoffs, larger clearances will be required to prevent the ends of the brackets protruding below the base of the enclosure.<br><br />
[[File:MB_tutorial_slot_bases.png|frame|'''''ATX Enclosure Base (left) and Mini-ITX Enclosure Base (right)'''''|center]]<br><br />
<br />
If you are not anticipating using all the slots, you can either omit cutouts as required, or specify "knockouts" in which Protocase cuts almost all the way around the perimeters of the cutouts, but leaves several tiny metal bridges that keep the center in place until you decide to physically remove them. Use caution with knockouts if using cold rolled steel in damp or corrosive environments, as small patches of bare metal will be left once the centers are removed. <br><br><br />
<br />
===Related Topics===<br />
*The [[http://www.formfactors.org/ '''Form Factors website''']] is a definitive source of information on motherboards.<br />
*Protocase's [[http://www.protocase.com/v3/design/template_generator.php Template Generator]] helps you create a design in the CAD format of your choice.<br />
*Tutorial on [[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Adding self-clinching fasteners to an enclosure''']]<br />
*Tutorial on [[Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector | '''Creating a custom cutout for a connector''']]<br />
*Paper on [[Using_L-Shape_Enclosures_for_PCBs_with_Opposing_Connectors|'''Using L-Shape Enclosures for PCBs with Opposing Connectors''']]<br />
*If you are importing a DXF of the circuit board, see '''[[#Importing_DXF_files | Importing DXF files]]''' for important constraints.<br />
*Download free CAD drawings of ATX and Mini ITX enclosures in [[http://www.protocase.com/pdf/Motherboard_enclosure_tutorial_2D_dxf_CAD_files.zip '''DXF''']] or [[((insert link after it is fixed)) '''SLDPRT''']] format.<br><br />
*Linus Sebastian, creator of LinusTech on YouTube, [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fGt9o0XUl5g '''showcases the assembly process'''] for the components that went inside his latest custom Rackmount build.<br />
*Looking for ideas and tips on designing a small computer case? Check out this [http://www.protocase.com/about/spotlight/lukasz-dyjakon/ '''extra small computer enclosure project'''] from Lukasz Dyjakon. His case is designed so that the two hottest components in the case, the CPU and graphics cards, are separated and have access to fresh air directly from outside the case.</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=DRAFT_-_Design_Considerations_for_Computer_Enclosures_Revision&diff=3070DRAFT - Design Considerations for Computer Enclosures Revision2016-09-26T14:41:30Z<p>Stownsend: Created page with "'''DRAFT - Design Considerations for Computer Enclosures'''<br><br> Awaiting 2 items: (1) changes desired by Doug (2) file corrections in [http://www.protocase.com/pdf/Motherb..."</p>
<hr />
<div>'''DRAFT - Design Considerations for Computer Enclosures'''<br><br><br />
Awaiting 2 items: (1) changes desired by Doug (2) file corrections in [http://www.protocase.com/pdf/Motherboard_enclosure_tutorial_2D_dxf_CAD_files.zip '''DXF'''] and [http://www.protocase.com/pdf/Download_related_CAD_drawings_3D_SLDPRT.zip '''SLDPRT'''] <br />
<br />
===Introduction===<br />
This paper covers essential considerations for computer enclosure design, whether you use Protocase Designer or another CAD program. Although the examples given are for ATX and Mini-ITX motherboards, the concepts and procedures apply to enclosures for all motherboards and custom-built circuit boards. The most common configuration is used, in which the board is mounted horizontally on the base of the enclosure and the I/O connectors are accessed through the rear of the enclosure. Key tasks are to design the mounting pattern on the base, and the openings for the I/O connector and card slot(s) on the rear panel. <br><br />
<br />
'''Note''': If you are planning to create an ATX or Mini-ITX computer enclosure with Protocase Designer, you can use Designer templates that include the motherboard layout and/or the hardware cutouts that are referenced in this paper. The templates and cutouts will save you the time and trouble of measuring dimensions for many items in the enclosure. Also, if you have a .DXF file of the PCB drawing, you can import the DXF into Designer to get the mounting hole locations and to check the fit. <br />
<br />
====Terms Used====<br />
*'''PCB''': Printed Circuit Board, either plain or populated with components. <br />
*'''Motherboard''': The PCB for a computer, containing the CPU (Central Processing Unit). <br />
*'''I/O''': Input/Output device for computer peripherals, such as a USB (Universal Serial Bus) or a PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) expansion card. The enclosure design includes cutouts for connectors on the I/O. <br />
*'''Connector''': The part of a cable that plugs into a port or interface to connect one device to another. Connector types include DB, DIN, and Centronics.<br><br><br />
<br />
===The Design Process===<br />
Overall dimensions, mounting points (hole patterns), PCI card details, and I/O connector block areas are standardized on all ATX and Mini-ITX form factors. The drawings below show the overall dimensions and mounting points for these boards. To locate the board correctly within your enclosure, you must provide sufficient clearance between the edges of the board and the enclosure walls and other components. This includes calculating the minimum clearances between the edges of the motherboard and fans, drives, cables, and the enclosure walls; the thickness of enclosure walls; and the height of standoffs. '''Note''': For greater detail on the drawings used in this paper, you can download them in either [http://www.protocase.com/pdf/Motherboard_enclosure_tutorial_2D_dxf_CAD_files.zip '''DXF'''] or [http://www.protocase.com/pdf/Download_related_CAD_drawings_3D_SLDPRT.zip '''SLDPRT'''] format.<br><br><br />
<br />
[[File:MB_tutorial_ATX_both_images.png|frame|center|'''''ATX Motherboard with Seven PCI Cards''''']]<br><br />
<br />
[[File:MB_tutorial_MiniITX_both_images.png|frame|center|'''''Mini-ITX Motherboard with a Single PCI Card''''']]<br><br />
<br />
===Motherboard Mounting Considerations===<br />
Motherboards must be attached to the enclosure with standoff fasteners, raising the board above the floor of the enclosure to avoid contact of parts on the underside with the metal casing, as shown below.<br><br />
[[File: MB_tutorial_image_Min_Offsets_Bottom.png|center]]<br><br />
<br />
In addition, if you are making your own board, components may be mounted on both sides of the board. In either of these cases, you will need to know the distance between the board and the enclosure. Because standoffs extend through the enclosure wall, you must subtract the the thickness of the sheet metal, plus 0.010” allowance for manufacturing tolerance, from the standoff length. A 0.375" standoff mounted in a 14-gauge (0.075") enclosure wall will provide only 0.30" clearance to the surface of the board, and less if the metal is thicker. Standard motherboard mounting holes accept a 6-32 thread size, and a 3/8" standoff should be suitable for most boards. The use of PEMs is the standard method to achieve this. If you do not use 6-32 x 3/8" standoffs, take care to consider surrounding PCI card tab slots and the height of cutouts for the I/O block and PCI card cutouts.<br><br />
<br />
If you are adding spacers, Protocase provides spacers (female-to-female connectors) that are designed to work with the <br />
FH-632-4ZI threaded stud or the non-zinc version. (They are included in the Protocase Designer computer enclosure templates, and with the cutouts for the ATX and Mini-ITX PEMs.) When building your own custom enclosure, you can add them to your design by using the 6-32 x 3/8" standoffs for the motherboard and adding a note that you need the spacers as well. We use a very short stud that you can screw the spacers into, so if your motherboard does not support one of the holes, you can just not put that spacer in and it will not interfere with your board. As noted earlier in this document, ensure that they are not placed too close to the sides or top of the enclosure. <br />
<br />
====Tips on optimizing your PCB design====<br />
If you are sourcing your PCB as an off-the-shelf item, then you have no control over the location of board connectors or mounting holes. Most boards are designed with mechanical mounting in mind, but if you are designing your board from scratch, make sure that mounting hardware on the board (such as PCB mounting holes and panel mount connectors) is not so close to the wall that it would interfere with the enclosure bend radius, which would make it difficult if not impossible to manufacture.<br><br />
<br />
For example, below are two boards, each with two mounting holes (indicated with a red arrow) and a connector. On board (A), the mounting holes are located 0.15" from the edge of the board. The difficulty with board (A) is that it must be placed close enough to the rear panel to allow the connector to pass through it. Because the mounting holes are so close to the edge of the board, the mounting hardware (usually a PEM) will be too close to the edge of the enclosure and will interfere with the enclosure bend radius. Board (B) is done propertly; the mounting holes are far enough back from the edge of the board to prevent any interference.<br><br />
[[File: MB_tutorial_image_re_mounting_holes.png|center]]<br><br />
<br />
Likewise, the board edge must not be flush with any connector that is going to be mounted flush with the side of the enclosure. In the example below, the connector on board (A) is mounted so close to the edge of the board that the board will have to be mounted with its edge just touching the enclosure side. Because there is no allowance for manufacturing variability, the board could get jammed into position when it is mounted, inducing stress on the board and compromising its electrical integrity. Board (B) on the right is done properly.<br><br />
[[File:MB_tutorial_image_re_panel.png|center]]<br><br />
<br />
A good rule of thumb is to leave at least 0.375" between the center of a mounting hole and the edge of the board. If there is less than that, contact [[mailto: info@protocase.com Protocase Engineering & Design Services]] to see if it can be manufactured. (The precise allowance depends on the size of the tool used to insert the PEM and how close to the edge the PEM is allowed. In Protocase Designer, PEMs and bends have exclusion zones displayed in red, and you will receive a warning if you place a PEM too close to a bend.)<br><br />
<br />
When the I/O is accessed from the lower edge of the motherboard (as it is with ATX and Mini-ITX boards), the board edge should be offset at least 0.065" from the inner face of the enclosure wall. This accommodates both the I/O plate adaptor (a small metal plate that comes with the motherboard and mounts over the I/O connectors) and the metal brackets on the PCI cards.<br><br />
<br />
Allow a minimum 0.25" clearance from the other board edges to their corresponding side panels, from the board to other parts such as flanges and fasteners, and from the top of the highest component to the inside of the top of the enclosure. (If you intend to use a fan-cooled processor, see the discussion on fan clearance later in this paper.) If you use smaller clearances, be sure to investigate every possible interference, and discuss it with [[mailto: info@protocase.com Protocase Engineering & Design Services]] before submitting your design for production.<br><br><br />
<br />
===Calculating Connector Cutout Locations===<br />
If the standoffs hold a circuit board with a connector on the rear of the enclosure, calculate the location of the bottom of the connector cutout by adding:<br />
:*the length of the standoff. Note that in this case you need not calculate the thickness of the enclosure bottom, because a 1/2" standoff is 1/2" from the outside to the top of the standoff sitting inside the box. You need to subtract the enclosure thickness only when you need to know how much free space runs under the board to the inside of the enclosure bottom. <br />
:*the height of the circuit board<br />
:*the distance from the bottom of the circuit board to the bottom of the connector <br />
:*0.010” tolerance<br><br><br />
[[File:MB_tutorial_parts_to_measure.png|center]]<br><br><br />
<br />
===Vents and Fans===<br />
Adequate ventilation must be designed into the enclosure to avoid overheating. When designing fan and vent placement, align intake and exhaust vents to take advantage of the current that they create. It is best to arrange the vent cutouts so that air will flow across the top of the board on its way through your enclosure. The figure below shows suggested placement of ventilation cutouts and enclosure exhaust fans in an ITX enclosure.<br><br />
[[File: MB_tutorial_ATX_vents_fan.png|center]]<br><br><br />
<br />
Vent fans are rated by the number of cubic feet of cooling air they move per minute (CFM), and it's important to buy a large enough fan for your enclosure. The required CFM can be calculated as follows:<br><br />
:CFM = 3.16 x Max Heat / T<br><br />
::Where:<br><br />
::* CFM (Cubic Feet per Minute) is the volume, and is the rating by which fans are purchased;<br />
::* Max Heat is the maximum sustained power dissipation (in watts) of boards and components inside the enclosure;<br />
::* T is the maximum allowable temperature rise (in degrees Fahrenheit).<br><br />
<br />
To maximize the effect of ventilation airflow, make sure that the only openings in your enclosure are those that will be filled by switches, connectors, or panel display features. Extraneous holes in the enclosure panels can cause disruption of natural convection currents, resulting in less effective cooling of the processors. If you intend to use a fan-cooled processor with very little clearance between the fan and the enclosure wall, use fans that pull air directionally across the processor heat sink, rather than down onto the top of the sink.<br><br />
<br />
Designs with air intake cutouts in the bottom panel should include feet to raise the enclosure off of its support surface. If you have bottom panel cutouts, place them outside the perimeter of the motherboard, since cutouts placed directly beneath the motherboard can allow objects to accidentally poke up through the spaces and contact the board, causing unwanted damage.<br><br><br />
<br />
===PCI Cards and Tab Slots===<br />
The diagrams below detail the standard slot-style cutouts for PCI card access for ATX and Mini-ITX boards. Add a flange on the top edge of the rear panel to allow the PCI card bracket(s) to be fastened. Screw holes should be placed at the dimensions shown for the screw opening on the top of the PCI card brackets. Draw the holes with a diameter of 0.1065" and add a note to “tap with 6-32 thread” because there is insufficient space to use a PEM nut here. You may also wish to add a vertical flange to the cover, to hide the gap between the cover and the flange with the screws. (In the Protocase Designer templates, both flanges are included.)<br />
<br />
[[File:MB_tutorial_image_ATX_rear_panel_cutouts.png|frame|'''''I/O and PCI Cutouts for Rear Panel of ATX Enclosure'''''|center]]<br><br />
<br />
[[File:MB_tutorial_MiniITX_base_slots.png|frame|'''''Mini-ITX Base with Card Slot Detail for 3/8” Standoffs'''''|center]]<br><br />
<br />
[[File:MB_tutorial_Righthand_view.png|frame|'''''Right-hand View of Mini-ITX Motherboard and PCI Card'''''|center]]<br><br />
<br />
When designing the enclosure base, be sure to accommodate the tabs found on the bottom of PCI card brackets. These tabs are designed to fit into a slot in the base to help secure the card. The following drawings show the ATX (left) and Mini-ITX (right) enclosure bases, with the PCI Card slot detail for 3/8" standoffs. This slot design applies if you are using the recommended 3/8"-high standoffs, but can be avoided by using standoffs that are 7/16" or longer. If you decide to use shorter standoffs, larger clearances will be required to prevent the ends of the brackets protruding below the base of the enclosure.<br><br />
[[File:MB_tutorial_slot_bases.png|frame|'''''ATX Enclosure Base (left) and Mini-ITX Enclosure Base (right)'''''|center]]<br><br />
<br />
If you are not anticipating using all the slots, you can either omit cutouts as required, or specify "knockouts" in which Protocase cuts almost all the way around the perimeters of the cutouts, but leaves several tiny metal bridges that keep the center in place until you decide to physically remove them. Use caution with knockouts if using cold rolled steel in damp or corrosive environments, as small patches of bare metal will be left once the centers are removed. <br><br><br />
<br />
===Related Topics===<br />
*The [[http://www.formfactors.org/ '''Form Factors website''']] is a definitive source of information on motherboards.<br />
*Protocase's [[http://www.protocase.com/v3/design/template_generator.php Template Generator]] helps you create a design in the CAD format of your choice.<br />
*Tutorial on [[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Adding self-clinching fasteners to an enclosure''']]<br />
*Tutorial on [[Creating_a_custom_cutout_for_a_connector | '''Creating a custom cutout for a connector''']]<br />
*Paper on [[Using_L-Shape_Enclosures_for_PCBs_with_Opposing_Connectors|'''Using L-Shape Enclosures for PCBs with Opposing Connectors''']]<br />
*If you are importing a DXF of the circuit board, see '''[[#Importing_DXF_files | Importing DXF files]]''' for important constraints.<br />
*Download free CAD drawings of ATX and Mini ITX enclosures in [[http://www.protocase.com/pdf/Motherboard_enclosure_tutorial_2D_dxf_CAD_files.zip '''DXF''']] or [[((insert link after it is fixed)) '''SLDPRT''']] format.<br><br />
*Linus Sebastian, creator of LinusTech on YouTube, [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fGt9o0XUl5g '''showcases the assembly process'''] for the components that went inside his latest custom Rackmount build.<br />
*Looking for ideas and tips on designing a small computer case? Check out this [http://www.protocase.com/about/spotlight/lukasz-dyjakon/ '''extra small computer enclosure project'''] from Lukasz Dyjakon. His case is designed so that the two hottest components in the case, the CPU and graphics cards, are separated and have access to fresh air directly from outside the case.</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&diff=30693D View Window2016-09-22T13:27:32Z<p>Stownsend: /* 3D View Preferences */</p>
<hr />
<div>=3D View Window overview=<br />
The 3D View window displays a 3D model of your enclosure that you can manipulate.<br> <br />
'''A: 3D Standard toolbar'''<br><br />
'''B: 3D Viewport'''<br><br />
[[File:window-main-labels.png|500px]]<br><br><br />
<br />
==3D Standard Toolbar==<br />
[[File:3d_standard_toolbar.png]]<br><br><br />
From left to right, the buttons are as listed below. '''Known Limitation:''' As of Version Jun09,16, which introduces new 3D View tools, the '''Edit Face''' button is displayed only in the left-hand toolbar. Prior to Version Jun09,16, the '''Edit Face''' button is in the 3D Standard toolbar.:<br />
{|<br />
| [[File:Bent_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|50px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Bent'''<br />
| View assembly with faces bent as in final manufacture.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Flat_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|50px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Flat'''<br />
| View assembly with faces flattened.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:New-assembly_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''New'''<br />
| Create a new enclosure (load a new template).<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Open-assembly_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Open'''<br />
| Open an existing assembly (.PDA) file.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Save_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Save'''<br />
| Save the current design.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:save-as_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|top]]<br />
| '''Save As'''<br />
| Save the current design under a new filename. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Reset_View_button.png|30px|top]]<br />
| '''Reset View'''<br />
| Reset the view to the original default view.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:View-angle_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|50px|top]]<br />
| '''View Angle'''<br />
| View assembly from the front, right, top, left, back, or bottom, or in the default isometric mode. Note that if you rotate or zoom in any angle view, the view returns to isometric. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Part-tree_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|50px|top]]<br />
| '''Part Tree'''<br />
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which details all parts and faces for the current assembly. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Ask-a-question_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|top]]<br />
| '''Question'''<br />
| Open the Ask a Question dialog, which lets you submit a question about your design and send it, with or without the design file and/or the debug log files, to Protocase Engineering & Design Services.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Rotate_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|50px|top]]<br />
| '''Rotate'''<br />
| Rotate the view.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Pan_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|50px|top]]<br />
| '''Pan'''<br />
| Pan the view. <br />
|}<br><br><br />
<br />
==3D View Preferences==<br />
If you want to use a different unit of measure or have other preferences when using Designer, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].<br><br><br />
<br />
=Creating, opening, and saving assembly files=<br />
<br />
==Creating a new assembly==<br />
#Click the '''New File''' button in the Pick An Option To Start window, choose '''File''' > '''New''', or click the '''Make New Enclosure From Template''' button [[File:Make_new_enclosure_from_template_button_3DView.png|25px]] in the 3D Standard toolbar. The New Assembly dialog opens. <br />
#;[[File:window-newassembly-noselection.png|500px]]<br />
#Select an assembly category on the left and then select an assembly. <br />
#;[[File:window-newassembly-ushape.png|500px]]<br />
#Modify the assembly parameters including size, thickness, material, and colour to meet your design requirements, conforming to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the window. See '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_enclosure_properties|Changing enclosure properties]]''' below for details. <br />
#*'''Note''': To create a custom bracket with cutouts and other elements, you use the 3D View window to create it, then you use the Face Editor to customize it and to add it to a face. See '''[[Face Editor#Creating and adding brackets|Creating and adding brackets]]''' for step-by-step instructions. <br />
#Click '''OK''' to view the 3D model.<br />
#;[[File:window-main-ushape.png|500px]]<br><br />
====Opening an existing assembly====<br />
#In the 3D View window, choose '''Open''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Open''' button in the Standard toolbar.<br />
#Select the file you want to open.<br />
====Saving an assembly====<br />
Files are saved in .PDA (Protocase Designer) format. (Note that you cannot save the enclosure design as a modified template; you can only save the enclosure design.) <br />
#Choose '''File''' > '''Save''' or click the '''Save''' button in the Standard toolbar.<br />
#If this is the first time the assembly is being saved, the Save dialog box opens. Select a location and enter a name for the file, then click '''Save'''.<br />
<br />
====Saving a copy of an assembly====<br />
#Choose '''Save As''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Save As''' button in the Standard toolbar.<br />
#In the Save dialog box that opens, select a location to save the file and enter a new name for the assembly, then click '''Save'''.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Changing assembly properties=<br />
At any point after you create a new assembly (enclosure, bracket, or panel) you can modify its properties such as size, thickness, material, colour, and screw type. <br />
#Choose '''Edit''' > '''Edit Enclosure Properties'''. The Edit Assembly dialog is displayed.<br />
#;[[File:3D_view_Edit_Properties_dialog.png|500px]]<br />
#Change any of the enclosure properties, being sure to conform to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the dialog.<br />
#If the template includes screws, the '''Screw Type''' is displayed with a default value. (Brackets and panels do not use screws.) To change the default screw, click the '''Screw Type''' down-arrow and choose the color (Black, Natural [Zinc], or Stainless) and type (Flathead or Panhead). <br />
#To save the modifications, click '''OK'''.<br><br />
'''Note'''<br><br />
:*When you select a rackmount enclosure template, the parameters include the '''Full Height Chassis''' check box. Selecting this checkbox causes the screws to be countersunk, and the enclosure the same height as the front of the rackmount.<br />
<br />
===Transferring an enclosure design===<br />
#Open the design that you want to transfer.<br />
#In the 3D View, choose '''File''' > '''Transfer to New Enclosure'''. <br />
#In the Transfer Design to New Assembly dialog that opens, select the new enclosure and modify parameters as needed. <br />
#:Designer will transfer parameters for enclosures of the same category; for example, if you are transferring between two types of Extruded enclosures, nothing needs to be changed. However, if you are transferring from a U Shape to a Rackmount, you may need to change some parameters manually.<br />
#Click '''OK'''. <br />
#:An untitled dialog opens, in which the face names of the original enclosure are listed on the left, and to the right of each name is a column of potential face names for the new enclosure. When the two designs use different names for a face (for example, a Rackmount has a "front panel," whereas a 1U Extruded has a "front plate," whereas a U Shape has just a "front"), select the appropriate face name for the new design. Many of these are pre-selected, but check them all and change the name or choose "Drop This Face" as necessary. <br />
#:'''Tip''' If you are unsure of a face name for an enclosure, you can check by loading the enclosure and viewing the face in the Face Editor. The face name is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Face Editor screen. <br />
#Click '''OK''' when done (or '''Cancel''' to abandon the new enclosure template and return to your original design). <br />
#Check each element of the new design against your original. For some transfers, the cutouts may need to be flipped or moved manually.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Viewing the model=<br />
There are several controls to allow viewing and manipulating the 3D model of your enclosure.<br />
<br><br />
==Rotating==<br />
The '''Rotate''' command rotates the model around its center.<br />
#Click the '''Rotate''' [[File:Rotate_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png]] button in the Standard toolbar.<br />
#Drag the model to rotate it to the desired orientation.<br />
<br />
==Panning==<br />
To move the model around the plane of the viewport, do any of the following:<br />
*Right-click the model and drag it.<br><br />
*Press and hold down the <Alt> key, then click and drag the model.<br><br />
*Click the '''Pan''' [[File:Pan_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png]] button in the Standard toolbar, then click and drag the model.<br />
<br />
==Zooming==<br />
To zoom the model in or out, rotate the wheel button forward or backward.<br><br />
'''Notes''' <br />
*The model zooms in/out from the centre of the viewport, regardless of the pointer location.<br><br />
*If your pointing device does not have a wheel, open the Face Editor and use the '''Zoom In''' and '''Zoom Out''' buttons in the Standard toolbar or the '''Zoom''' commands in the '''View''' menu.<br><br />
<br />
==Show/Hide Parts==<br />
The Show/Hide Parts command lets you view inside the model by hiding one or more parts.<br />
#Choose '''View''' > '''Show/Hide Parts'''. The Show/Hide Parts dialog box is displayed.<br />
#Select or clear the appropriate check boxes to show or hide parts.<br />
<br />
==Toggle flat/bent view==<br />
The Toggle Flat and Bent commands displays the enclosure parts as they are laid out prior to the bending process during manufacturing. These commands are for reference only, and do not affect the manufacturing of the final enclosure. You can do either of the following:<br><br />
*To display the model in a flat view, click the '''Flat''' [[File:Flat_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png]] button in the Standard toolbar. To display the model in the bent view, click the '''Bent''' [[File:Bent_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png]] button. By default, the model is displayed in the bent view.<br />
*You can also change between the two views by choosing '''View''' > '''Toggle Flat'''.<br />
<br />
==Reset view==<br />
The Reset View command displays the model in the center of the viewport in its original orientation.<br />
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset_View_button.png|text-bottom]] in the Standard toolbar, or choose '''Reset View''' from the '''View''' menu.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Editing a face=<br />
You use the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics, exclusion zones, masking, and construction lines to a face.<br />
<br><br />
To open the Face Editor:<br />
#Rotate the model to show the face you want to edit.<br />
#Click the '''Edit Face''' button. [[File:button-editface.png|30px|bottom]]. The pointer will change to a crosshair.<br />
#Click a face to edit. The [[Face Editor|Face Editor window]] opens.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Viewing the Part Tree=<br />
The Part Tree shows a hierarchical list of all the faces and objects in your enclosure. You can change the name and description of objects as well as open a face in the Face Editor Window directly from the Part Tree.<br><br />
[[File:window-parttree-ushape-note.png|500px]]<br />
<br />
==Navigate the Part Tree==<br />
#Click the icon to the left of a face to display the objects on that face below.<br />
#Click an object name to display description, and notes on the right of the Part Tree window.<br />
<br />
==Change object name and description==<br />
#Click an object name on the left.<br />
#Type a new name or description on the right.<br />
<br />
==Add/Delete notes==<br />
You can add notes to parts, faces, and objects for your own reference or to provide additional information to technical support<br />
such as "Please scrub this with a scouring pad". You can also use it to place features that might not be permitted in Protocase Designer® but can be manufactured with certain restrictions. For example, you could create a circle using construction lines near the edge of a face on the exclusion zone (where you wouldn't normally be able to place a self-clinching standoff) and add a note "Add 6-32 x 3/8" standoff here".<br />
#Click an object name on the left.<br />
#Do one of the following:<br />
#*If there are no notes, type a note in the notes field.<br />
#*If there are existing notes, click '''New Note''' and type a note in the notes field.<br />
#Click the arrows to view each note.<br />
#Click '''Delete Note''' to delete the currently displayed note.<br />
<br />
==Editing a face from the Part Tree==<br />
#Click a face name on the left.<br />
#Click '''Edit Face'''. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.<br />
#:[[File:window-parttree-ushape-editface.png|500px]]<br />
'''Note''': The Part Tree window can also be accessed from the Face Editor.</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&diff=30683D View Window2016-09-22T13:27:07Z<p>Stownsend: /* 3D Standard Toolbar */</p>
<hr />
<div>=3D View Window overview=<br />
The 3D View window displays a 3D model of your enclosure that you can manipulate.<br> <br />
'''A: 3D Standard toolbar'''<br><br />
'''B: 3D Viewport'''<br><br />
[[File:window-main-labels.png|500px]]<br><br><br />
<br />
==3D Standard Toolbar==<br />
[[File:3d_standard_toolbar.png]]<br><br><br />
From left to right, the buttons are as listed below. '''Known Limitation:''' As of Version Jun09,16, which introduces new 3D View tools, the '''Edit Face''' button is displayed only in the left-hand toolbar. Prior to Version Jun09,16, the '''Edit Face''' button is in the 3D Standard toolbar.:<br />
{|<br />
| [[File:Bent_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|50px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Bent'''<br />
| View assembly with faces bent as in final manufacture.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Flat_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|50px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Flat'''<br />
| View assembly with faces flattened.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:New-assembly_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''New'''<br />
| Create a new enclosure (load a new template).<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Open-assembly_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Open'''<br />
| Open an existing assembly (.PDA) file.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Save_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Save'''<br />
| Save the current design.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:save-as_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|top]]<br />
| '''Save As'''<br />
| Save the current design under a new filename. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Reset_View_button.png|30px|top]]<br />
| '''Reset View'''<br />
| Reset the view to the original default view.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:View-angle_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|50px|top]]<br />
| '''View Angle'''<br />
| View assembly from the front, right, top, left, back, or bottom, or in the default isometric mode. Note that if you rotate or zoom in any angle view, the view returns to isometric. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Part-tree_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|50px|top]]<br />
| '''Part Tree'''<br />
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which details all parts and faces for the current assembly. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Ask-a-question_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|top]]<br />
| '''Question'''<br />
| Open the Ask a Question dialog, which lets you submit a question about your design and send it, with or without the design file and/or the debug log files, to Protocase Engineering & Design Services.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Rotate_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|50px|top]]<br />
| '''Rotate'''<br />
| Rotate the view.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Pan_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|50px|top]]<br />
| '''Pan'''<br />
| Pan the view. <br />
|}<br><br><br />
<br />
==3D View Preferences==<br />
'''Note''': If you like to use a different unit of measure or have other preferences when using Designer, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].<br><br><br />
<br />
=Creating, opening, and saving assembly files=<br />
<br />
==Creating a new assembly==<br />
#Click the '''New File''' button in the Pick An Option To Start window, choose '''File''' > '''New''', or click the '''Make New Enclosure From Template''' button [[File:Make_new_enclosure_from_template_button_3DView.png|25px]] in the 3D Standard toolbar. The New Assembly dialog opens. <br />
#;[[File:window-newassembly-noselection.png|500px]]<br />
#Select an assembly category on the left and then select an assembly. <br />
#;[[File:window-newassembly-ushape.png|500px]]<br />
#Modify the assembly parameters including size, thickness, material, and colour to meet your design requirements, conforming to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the window. See '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_enclosure_properties|Changing enclosure properties]]''' below for details. <br />
#*'''Note''': To create a custom bracket with cutouts and other elements, you use the 3D View window to create it, then you use the Face Editor to customize it and to add it to a face. See '''[[Face Editor#Creating and adding brackets|Creating and adding brackets]]''' for step-by-step instructions. <br />
#Click '''OK''' to view the 3D model.<br />
#;[[File:window-main-ushape.png|500px]]<br><br />
====Opening an existing assembly====<br />
#In the 3D View window, choose '''Open''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Open''' button in the Standard toolbar.<br />
#Select the file you want to open.<br />
====Saving an assembly====<br />
Files are saved in .PDA (Protocase Designer) format. (Note that you cannot save the enclosure design as a modified template; you can only save the enclosure design.) <br />
#Choose '''File''' > '''Save''' or click the '''Save''' button in the Standard toolbar.<br />
#If this is the first time the assembly is being saved, the Save dialog box opens. Select a location and enter a name for the file, then click '''Save'''.<br />
<br />
====Saving a copy of an assembly====<br />
#Choose '''Save As''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Save As''' button in the Standard toolbar.<br />
#In the Save dialog box that opens, select a location to save the file and enter a new name for the assembly, then click '''Save'''.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Changing assembly properties=<br />
At any point after you create a new assembly (enclosure, bracket, or panel) you can modify its properties such as size, thickness, material, colour, and screw type. <br />
#Choose '''Edit''' > '''Edit Enclosure Properties'''. The Edit Assembly dialog is displayed.<br />
#;[[File:3D_view_Edit_Properties_dialog.png|500px]]<br />
#Change any of the enclosure properties, being sure to conform to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the dialog.<br />
#If the template includes screws, the '''Screw Type''' is displayed with a default value. (Brackets and panels do not use screws.) To change the default screw, click the '''Screw Type''' down-arrow and choose the color (Black, Natural [Zinc], or Stainless) and type (Flathead or Panhead). <br />
#To save the modifications, click '''OK'''.<br><br />
'''Note'''<br><br />
:*When you select a rackmount enclosure template, the parameters include the '''Full Height Chassis''' check box. Selecting this checkbox causes the screws to be countersunk, and the enclosure the same height as the front of the rackmount.<br />
<br />
===Transferring an enclosure design===<br />
#Open the design that you want to transfer.<br />
#In the 3D View, choose '''File''' > '''Transfer to New Enclosure'''. <br />
#In the Transfer Design to New Assembly dialog that opens, select the new enclosure and modify parameters as needed. <br />
#:Designer will transfer parameters for enclosures of the same category; for example, if you are transferring between two types of Extruded enclosures, nothing needs to be changed. However, if you are transferring from a U Shape to a Rackmount, you may need to change some parameters manually.<br />
#Click '''OK'''. <br />
#:An untitled dialog opens, in which the face names of the original enclosure are listed on the left, and to the right of each name is a column of potential face names for the new enclosure. When the two designs use different names for a face (for example, a Rackmount has a "front panel," whereas a 1U Extruded has a "front plate," whereas a U Shape has just a "front"), select the appropriate face name for the new design. Many of these are pre-selected, but check them all and change the name or choose "Drop This Face" as necessary. <br />
#:'''Tip''' If you are unsure of a face name for an enclosure, you can check by loading the enclosure and viewing the face in the Face Editor. The face name is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Face Editor screen. <br />
#Click '''OK''' when done (or '''Cancel''' to abandon the new enclosure template and return to your original design). <br />
#Check each element of the new design against your original. For some transfers, the cutouts may need to be flipped or moved manually.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Viewing the model=<br />
There are several controls to allow viewing and manipulating the 3D model of your enclosure.<br />
<br><br />
==Rotating==<br />
The '''Rotate''' command rotates the model around its center.<br />
#Click the '''Rotate''' [[File:Rotate_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png]] button in the Standard toolbar.<br />
#Drag the model to rotate it to the desired orientation.<br />
<br />
==Panning==<br />
To move the model around the plane of the viewport, do any of the following:<br />
*Right-click the model and drag it.<br><br />
*Press and hold down the <Alt> key, then click and drag the model.<br><br />
*Click the '''Pan''' [[File:Pan_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png]] button in the Standard toolbar, then click and drag the model.<br />
<br />
==Zooming==<br />
To zoom the model in or out, rotate the wheel button forward or backward.<br><br />
'''Notes''' <br />
*The model zooms in/out from the centre of the viewport, regardless of the pointer location.<br><br />
*If your pointing device does not have a wheel, open the Face Editor and use the '''Zoom In''' and '''Zoom Out''' buttons in the Standard toolbar or the '''Zoom''' commands in the '''View''' menu.<br><br />
<br />
==Show/Hide Parts==<br />
The Show/Hide Parts command lets you view inside the model by hiding one or more parts.<br />
#Choose '''View''' > '''Show/Hide Parts'''. The Show/Hide Parts dialog box is displayed.<br />
#Select or clear the appropriate check boxes to show or hide parts.<br />
<br />
==Toggle flat/bent view==<br />
The Toggle Flat and Bent commands displays the enclosure parts as they are laid out prior to the bending process during manufacturing. These commands are for reference only, and do not affect the manufacturing of the final enclosure. You can do either of the following:<br><br />
*To display the model in a flat view, click the '''Flat''' [[File:Flat_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png]] button in the Standard toolbar. To display the model in the bent view, click the '''Bent''' [[File:Bent_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png]] button. By default, the model is displayed in the bent view.<br />
*You can also change between the two views by choosing '''View''' > '''Toggle Flat'''.<br />
<br />
==Reset view==<br />
The Reset View command displays the model in the center of the viewport in its original orientation.<br />
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset_View_button.png|text-bottom]] in the Standard toolbar, or choose '''Reset View''' from the '''View''' menu.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Editing a face=<br />
You use the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics, exclusion zones, masking, and construction lines to a face.<br />
<br><br />
To open the Face Editor:<br />
#Rotate the model to show the face you want to edit.<br />
#Click the '''Edit Face''' button. [[File:button-editface.png|30px|bottom]]. The pointer will change to a crosshair.<br />
#Click a face to edit. The [[Face Editor|Face Editor window]] opens.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Viewing the Part Tree=<br />
The Part Tree shows a hierarchical list of all the faces and objects in your enclosure. You can change the name and description of objects as well as open a face in the Face Editor Window directly from the Part Tree.<br><br />
[[File:window-parttree-ushape-note.png|500px]]<br />
<br />
==Navigate the Part Tree==<br />
#Click the icon to the left of a face to display the objects on that face below.<br />
#Click an object name to display description, and notes on the right of the Part Tree window.<br />
<br />
==Change object name and description==<br />
#Click an object name on the left.<br />
#Type a new name or description on the right.<br />
<br />
==Add/Delete notes==<br />
You can add notes to parts, faces, and objects for your own reference or to provide additional information to technical support<br />
such as "Please scrub this with a scouring pad". You can also use it to place features that might not be permitted in Protocase Designer® but can be manufactured with certain restrictions. For example, you could create a circle using construction lines near the edge of a face on the exclusion zone (where you wouldn't normally be able to place a self-clinching standoff) and add a note "Add 6-32 x 3/8" standoff here".<br />
#Click an object name on the left.<br />
#Do one of the following:<br />
#*If there are no notes, type a note in the notes field.<br />
#*If there are existing notes, click '''New Note''' and type a note in the notes field.<br />
#Click the arrows to view each note.<br />
#Click '''Delete Note''' to delete the currently displayed note.<br />
<br />
==Editing a face from the Part Tree==<br />
#Click a face name on the left.<br />
#Click '''Edit Face'''. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.<br />
#:[[File:window-parttree-ushape-editface.png|500px]]<br />
'''Note''': The Part Tree window can also be accessed from the Face Editor.</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&diff=30673D View Window2016-09-22T13:25:11Z<p>Stownsend: /* 3D Standard Toolbar */</p>
<hr />
<div>=3D View Window overview=<br />
The 3D View window displays a 3D model of your enclosure that you can manipulate.<br> <br />
'''A: 3D Standard toolbar'''<br><br />
'''B: 3D Viewport'''<br><br />
[[File:window-main-labels.png|500px]]<br><br><br />
<br />
==3D Standard Toolbar==<br />
[[File:3d_standard_toolbar.png]]<br><br><br />
From left to right, the buttons are as listed below. '''Known Limitation:''' As of Version Jun09,16, which introduces new 3D View tools, the '''Edit Face''' button is displayed only in the left-hand toolbar. Prior to Version Jun09,16, the '''Edit Face''' button is in the 3D Standard toolbar.:<br />
{|<br />
| [[File:Bent_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Bent'''<br />
| View assembly with faces bent as in final manufacture.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Flat_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Flat'''<br />
| View assembly with faces flattened.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:New-assembly_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''New'''<br />
| Create a new enclosure (load a new template).<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Open-assembly_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Open'''<br />
| Open an existing assembly (.PDA) file.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Save_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|bottom]]<br />
| '''Save'''<br />
| Save the current design.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:save-as_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|top]]<br />
| '''Save As'''<br />
| Save the current design under a new filename. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Reset_View_button.png|30px|top]]<br />
| '''Reset View'''<br />
| Reset the view to the original default view.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:View-angle_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|top]]<br />
| '''View Angle'''<br />
| View assembly from the front, right, top, left, back, or bottom, or in the default isometric mode. Note that if you rotate or zoom in any angle view, the view returns to isometric. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Part-tree_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|top]]<br />
| '''Part Tree'''<br />
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which details all parts and faces for the current assembly. <br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Ask-a-question_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|top]]<br />
| '''Question'''<br />
| Open the Ask a Question dialog, which lets you submit a question about your design and send it, with or without the design file and/or the debug log files, to Protocase Engineering & Design Services.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Rotate_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|top]]<br />
| '''Rotate'''<br />
| Rotate the view.<br />
|-<br />
| [[File:Pan_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png|30px|top]]<br />
| '''Pan'''<br />
| Pan the view. <br />
|}<br><br><br />
<br />
==3D View Preferences==<br />
'''Note''': If you like to use a different unit of measure or have other preferences when using Designer, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].<br><br><br />
<br />
=Creating, opening, and saving assembly files=<br />
<br />
==Creating a new assembly==<br />
#Click the '''New File''' button in the Pick An Option To Start window, choose '''File''' > '''New''', or click the '''Make New Enclosure From Template''' button [[File:Make_new_enclosure_from_template_button_3DView.png|25px]] in the 3D Standard toolbar. The New Assembly dialog opens. <br />
#;[[File:window-newassembly-noselection.png|500px]]<br />
#Select an assembly category on the left and then select an assembly. <br />
#;[[File:window-newassembly-ushape.png|500px]]<br />
#Modify the assembly parameters including size, thickness, material, and colour to meet your design requirements, conforming to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the window. See '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_enclosure_properties|Changing enclosure properties]]''' below for details. <br />
#*'''Note''': To create a custom bracket with cutouts and other elements, you use the 3D View window to create it, then you use the Face Editor to customize it and to add it to a face. See '''[[Face Editor#Creating and adding brackets|Creating and adding brackets]]''' for step-by-step instructions. <br />
#Click '''OK''' to view the 3D model.<br />
#;[[File:window-main-ushape.png|500px]]<br><br />
====Opening an existing assembly====<br />
#In the 3D View window, choose '''Open''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Open''' button in the Standard toolbar.<br />
#Select the file you want to open.<br />
====Saving an assembly====<br />
Files are saved in .PDA (Protocase Designer) format. (Note that you cannot save the enclosure design as a modified template; you can only save the enclosure design.) <br />
#Choose '''File''' > '''Save''' or click the '''Save''' button in the Standard toolbar.<br />
#If this is the first time the assembly is being saved, the Save dialog box opens. Select a location and enter a name for the file, then click '''Save'''.<br />
<br />
====Saving a copy of an assembly====<br />
#Choose '''Save As''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Save As''' button in the Standard toolbar.<br />
#In the Save dialog box that opens, select a location to save the file and enter a new name for the assembly, then click '''Save'''.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Changing assembly properties=<br />
At any point after you create a new assembly (enclosure, bracket, or panel) you can modify its properties such as size, thickness, material, colour, and screw type. <br />
#Choose '''Edit''' > '''Edit Enclosure Properties'''. The Edit Assembly dialog is displayed.<br />
#;[[File:3D_view_Edit_Properties_dialog.png|500px]]<br />
#Change any of the enclosure properties, being sure to conform to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the dialog.<br />
#If the template includes screws, the '''Screw Type''' is displayed with a default value. (Brackets and panels do not use screws.) To change the default screw, click the '''Screw Type''' down-arrow and choose the color (Black, Natural [Zinc], or Stainless) and type (Flathead or Panhead). <br />
#To save the modifications, click '''OK'''.<br><br />
'''Note'''<br><br />
:*When you select a rackmount enclosure template, the parameters include the '''Full Height Chassis''' check box. Selecting this checkbox causes the screws to be countersunk, and the enclosure the same height as the front of the rackmount.<br />
<br />
===Transferring an enclosure design===<br />
#Open the design that you want to transfer.<br />
#In the 3D View, choose '''File''' > '''Transfer to New Enclosure'''. <br />
#In the Transfer Design to New Assembly dialog that opens, select the new enclosure and modify parameters as needed. <br />
#:Designer will transfer parameters for enclosures of the same category; for example, if you are transferring between two types of Extruded enclosures, nothing needs to be changed. However, if you are transferring from a U Shape to a Rackmount, you may need to change some parameters manually.<br />
#Click '''OK'''. <br />
#:An untitled dialog opens, in which the face names of the original enclosure are listed on the left, and to the right of each name is a column of potential face names for the new enclosure. When the two designs use different names for a face (for example, a Rackmount has a "front panel," whereas a 1U Extruded has a "front plate," whereas a U Shape has just a "front"), select the appropriate face name for the new design. Many of these are pre-selected, but check them all and change the name or choose "Drop This Face" as necessary. <br />
#:'''Tip''' If you are unsure of a face name for an enclosure, you can check by loading the enclosure and viewing the face in the Face Editor. The face name is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Face Editor screen. <br />
#Click '''OK''' when done (or '''Cancel''' to abandon the new enclosure template and return to your original design). <br />
#Check each element of the new design against your original. For some transfers, the cutouts may need to be flipped or moved manually.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Viewing the model=<br />
There are several controls to allow viewing and manipulating the 3D model of your enclosure.<br />
<br><br />
==Rotating==<br />
The '''Rotate''' command rotates the model around its center.<br />
#Click the '''Rotate''' [[File:Rotate_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png]] button in the Standard toolbar.<br />
#Drag the model to rotate it to the desired orientation.<br />
<br />
==Panning==<br />
To move the model around the plane of the viewport, do any of the following:<br />
*Right-click the model and drag it.<br><br />
*Press and hold down the <Alt> key, then click and drag the model.<br><br />
*Click the '''Pan''' [[File:Pan_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png]] button in the Standard toolbar, then click and drag the model.<br />
<br />
==Zooming==<br />
To zoom the model in or out, rotate the wheel button forward or backward.<br><br />
'''Notes''' <br />
*The model zooms in/out from the centre of the viewport, regardless of the pointer location.<br><br />
*If your pointing device does not have a wheel, open the Face Editor and use the '''Zoom In''' and '''Zoom Out''' buttons in the Standard toolbar or the '''Zoom''' commands in the '''View''' menu.<br><br />
<br />
==Show/Hide Parts==<br />
The Show/Hide Parts command lets you view inside the model by hiding one or more parts.<br />
#Choose '''View''' > '''Show/Hide Parts'''. The Show/Hide Parts dialog box is displayed.<br />
#Select or clear the appropriate check boxes to show or hide parts.<br />
<br />
==Toggle flat/bent view==<br />
The Toggle Flat and Bent commands displays the enclosure parts as they are laid out prior to the bending process during manufacturing. These commands are for reference only, and do not affect the manufacturing of the final enclosure. You can do either of the following:<br><br />
*To display the model in a flat view, click the '''Flat''' [[File:Flat_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png]] button in the Standard toolbar. To display the model in the bent view, click the '''Bent''' [[File:Bent_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png]] button. By default, the model is displayed in the bent view.<br />
*You can also change between the two views by choosing '''View''' > '''Toggle Flat'''.<br />
<br />
==Reset view==<br />
The Reset View command displays the model in the center of the viewport in its original orientation.<br />
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset_View_button.png|text-bottom]] in the Standard toolbar, or choose '''Reset View''' from the '''View''' menu.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Editing a face=<br />
You use the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics, exclusion zones, masking, and construction lines to a face.<br />
<br><br />
To open the Face Editor:<br />
#Rotate the model to show the face you want to edit.<br />
#Click the '''Edit Face''' button. [[File:button-editface.png|30px|bottom]]. The pointer will change to a crosshair.<br />
#Click a face to edit. The [[Face Editor|Face Editor window]] opens.<br><br><br />
<br />
=Viewing the Part Tree=<br />
The Part Tree shows a hierarchical list of all the faces and objects in your enclosure. You can change the name and description of objects as well as open a face in the Face Editor Window directly from the Part Tree.<br><br />
[[File:window-parttree-ushape-note.png|500px]]<br />
<br />
==Navigate the Part Tree==<br />
#Click the icon to the left of a face to display the objects on that face below.<br />
#Click an object name to display description, and notes on the right of the Part Tree window.<br />
<br />
==Change object name and description==<br />
#Click an object name on the left.<br />
#Type a new name or description on the right.<br />
<br />
==Add/Delete notes==<br />
You can add notes to parts, faces, and objects for your own reference or to provide additional information to technical support<br />
such as "Please scrub this with a scouring pad". You can also use it to place features that might not be permitted in Protocase Designer® but can be manufactured with certain restrictions. For example, you could create a circle using construction lines near the edge of a face on the exclusion zone (where you wouldn't normally be able to place a self-clinching standoff) and add a note "Add 6-32 x 3/8" standoff here".<br />
#Click an object name on the left.<br />
#Do one of the following:<br />
#*If there are no notes, type a note in the notes field.<br />
#*If there are existing notes, click '''New Note''' and type a note in the notes field.<br />
#Click the arrows to view each note.<br />
#Click '''Delete Note''' to delete the currently displayed note.<br />
<br />
==Editing a face from the Part Tree==<br />
#Click a face name on the left.<br />
#Click '''Edit Face'''. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.<br />
#:[[File:window-parttree-ushape-editface.png|500px]]<br />
'''Note''': The Part Tree window can also be accessed from the Face Editor.</div>Stownsendhttps://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released&diff=3061Knowledgebase - Software Fixes Released2016-09-15T13:39:05Z<p>Stownsend: /* Links to the latest release */</p>
<hr />
<div>__NOTOC__<br />
Fixes are documented on this page as they are released in Beta versions after the current General Release, which is Version 4.5. Links to fixes in previous Beta releases are at the bottom of this page.<br><br><br />
<br />
==Links to the latest release==<br />
The latest version released is [[Release_Notes_for_BETA_Version_4.5.3-Jun09|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.5.3-Jun09,16''']]. To begin the download, click the appropriate link below. For installation instructions, please see [[Quick Start#Installing Designer|Installing Designer]].<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-4.5.3-Jun09,16.exe '''Windows''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Jun09,16.zip '''Mac OSX in ZIP format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-OSX-4.5.3-Jun09,16.tar '''Mac OSX in TAR format''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/jdesigner-4.5.3-Jun09,16-x64.deb '''Linux Debian amd64''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/jdesigner-4.5.3-Jun09,16-i586.deb '''Linux Debian i586''']]<br><br />
:[[http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-linux-amd64-4.5.3-Jun09,16.tar.gz '''Linux amd64''']]<br><br />
:[[http://http://protocasedesigner.com/RELEASE/protocaseDesigner-linux-i586-4.5.3-Jun09,16.tar.gz '''Linux i586''']]<br><br><br />
<br />
==Fixes released in May 2016==<br />
===Corners with 0.0" radii===<br />
Version 4.5.3-May06 fixes an issue in which a bracket with a 0.0" corner radius caused Designer to crash. With this release, 0.0" radii are supported. <br />
===Tapped holes for connectors===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-May06,16, the USB 3.0 A-A panel connector and USB A-A coupler use tapped holes. <br />
===Cutout Library listing===<br />
Version 4.5.3-May06,16 fixes an issue in which the Cutout Library displayed items that were not useful for customers. (Known Issue: Admin Hardware is still displayed.)<br />
<br />
==Fixes released in April 2016==<br />
===5 Sided Enclosures and Consolets===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr27,16 fixed an issue in which cutouts in older 5-sided enclosures and consolets changed position when loaded. <br />
===Text Kerning===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr27,16 implemented text ''kerning,'' in which spacing is adjusted typographically between characters in proportional fonts. Text in previous designs will be retained without kerning, so that the text layout is not changed without the user being aware of it. <br />
===Documentation===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16, the Help menus for the Face Editor and Cutout Editor contain links to the documentation. <br />
===L Shape enclosures===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16 fixed an issue in which the L Shape enclosure template did not allow room for the seam welds when '''Has Seam Welds''' was selected.<br />
===Loading older files with PEMs===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Apr11,16 fixed an issue in which opening certain older enclosure designs with PEMs did not load the PEMs. <br />
<br />
==Fixes released in March 2016==<br />
===Digital printing===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which digital printing could be incorrectly applied to a face that had no text or graphics (and included in the quote).<br />
===Text size in older files===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which, when older (4.2.x) files with text were loaded, the text size was incorrect when first loaded. <br />
===PEM nuts for thin enclosures===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Mar03, a different PEM nut is given to any enclosure (including the U Shape) with thin metal. <br />
===Wall mounts in 5-sided enclosures===<br />
As of Version 4.5.3-Mar03, the 5-Sided enclosure template defaults to being without wall mounts, and the '''Has Wall Mounts''' check box is cleared. <br />
===Cutout Editor===<br />
Version 4.5.3-Mar03 fixes an issue in which selecting an object in the Cutout Editor selected everything rather than just that object.<br />
==Fixes released in February 2016==<br />
===PEMs===<br />
Version 4.5.3 fixes an issue that prevented PEMs from being displayed on some older enclosure files, and an automated test was added to prevent it from recurring. <br />
===U Shape enclosures===<br />
With Version 4.5.3, U Shape enclosures are given thinner nuts when the metal demands them. <br />
===Cutout Library===<br />
*Version 4.5.3 fixes the issue introduced in Version 4.5 in which, after creating a cutout in the Cutout Library, when you clicked '''Accept and Close''', the cutout appeared to have been deleted.<br />
*Version 4.5.2 fixes the issue in which hiding non-stock PEMs in the Cutout Library caused several problems (including previews not displaying, cutouts not storing correctly, and PEM dialog problems). These issues were fixed by returning the visibility of the non-stock items. The items will be hidden again in a future release.<br />
<br />
===Installing on a Mac OSX===<br />
Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16 fixes an issue in which installation on a Mac OSX produced an error message that the download was broken. <br />
===Rackmounts===<br />
Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16 fixes the issue in which galvaneal rackmounts with mounting brackets took many minutes to load.<br />
===Displaying cutout outlines===<br />
In Version 4.5.1-Feb16,16, the option to have the 3D View show or hide outlines for cutouts was added to Preferences. <br />
<br />
==Archival Beta Release Notes==<br />
[[Fixes released in Version 4.4.9|Fixes released for Version 4.4.9]]</div>Stownsend